You are on page 1of 282

1 Cabinet ...........................................................................................................

1-1
1.1 Structure ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Capacity ................................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 Parameters ............................................................................................. 1-4
2 Power Box ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Functions ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Panel Description ................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 DIP Switches .......................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Interface Description .............................................................................. 2-5
2.4.1 SERIAL Interface ........................................................................... 2-5
2.4.2 ALARM Interface ............................................................................ 2-5
2.5 Technical Parameters ............................................................................ 2-9
3 Subrack .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Structure ................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Interface Area ......................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Fan Tray Assembly ................................................................................ 3-5
3.4 Parameters ............................................................................................. 3-6
4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame ........................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM) .............................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Working Principle ........................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Functions ....................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Application ..................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4 Parameters .................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 DCM Frame ............................................................................................ 4-2
4.3 HUB Frame ............................................................................................ 4-4
5 Overview of Boards ...................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Board Category ...................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Board Appearance ................................................................................. 5-4
6 Optical Transponder Unit ............................................................................. 6-1
6.1 LWF/LWFS ............................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-3
6.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-5
6.2 LRF/LRFS .............................................................................................. 6-8
6.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-9
6.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-11
6.3 LBE/LBES .............................................................................................. 6-13
6.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-14
6.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-16
6.4 TMX/TMXS ............................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-19
6.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-21
6.5 TMR/TMRS ............................................................................................ 6-24
6.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-24
6.5.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-25
6.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-25
6.5.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-27
6.6 LWC1 ..................................................................................................... 6-29
6.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-29
6.6.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-29
6.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-30
6.6.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-32
6.7 TRC1 ...................................................................................................... 6-35
6.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-35
6.7.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-36
6.7.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-36
6.7.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-38
6.8 LWM ....................................................................................................... 6-39
6.8.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-39
6.8.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-40
6.8.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-41
6.8.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-42
6.9 LWMR .................................................................................................... 6-44
6.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6-44
6.9.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6-45
6.9.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6-45
6.9.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6-47
6.10 LWX...................................................................................................... 6-48
6.10.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 6-48
6.10.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 6-49
6.10.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 6-50
6.10.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 6-51
6.11 LWXR ................................................................................................... 6-54
6.11.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 6-54
6.11.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 6-54
6.11.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 6-55
6.11.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 6-57
6.12 LDG/FDG ............................................................................................. 6-59
6.12.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 6-59
6.12.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 6-59
6.12.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 6-60
6.12.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 6-62
6.13 LOG/LOGS ........................................................................................... 6-64
6.13.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 6-64
6.13.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 6-65
6.13.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 6-66
6.13.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 6-67
7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit ............................ 7-1
7.1 M40 and V40 .......................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7-5
7.2 D40 ......................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7-9
7.3 MR2 ........................................................................................................ 7-10
7.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7-10
7.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7-13
7.4 DWC ....................................................................................................... 7-14
7.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-14
7.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7-15
7.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-16
7.4.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7-17
7.5 ITL .......................................................................................................... 7-19
7.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-19
7.5.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7-19
7.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-20
7.5.4 Parameter Description ................................................................... 7-21
7.5.5 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7-21
7.6 FIU .......................................................................................................... 7-22
7.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7-23
7.6.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7-23
7.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7-25
7.6.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7-28
8 Optical Amplifier Unit ................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 OAU ........................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8-6
8.2 OBU ........................................................................................................ 8-11
8.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8-12
8.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8-14
8.3 OPU ........................................................................................................ 8-16
8.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8-17
8.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8-18
8.4 HBA ........................................................................................................ 8-20
8.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-20
8.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8-20
8.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-21
8.4.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8-23
8.5 Raman Amplifier ..................................................................................... 8-24
8.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8-24
8.5.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8-25
8.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8-26
8.5.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8-27
9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units .......................................... 9-1
9.1 MCA ....................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9-4
9.2 VA4......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9-5
9.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9-8
9.3 VOA ........................................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9-9
9.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9-11
9.4 DGE ........................................................................................................ 9-12
9.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-12
9.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9-12
9.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9-15
9.5 DSE ........................................................................................................ 9-16
9.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9-16
9.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9-18
9.6 GFU ........................................................................................................ 9-19
9.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9-19
9.6.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9-19
9.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9-20
9.6.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9-22
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units................................................ 10-1
10.1 FMU...................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 10-3
10.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 10-4
10.1.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 10-5
10.2 MWA ..................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 10-7
10.2.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 10-7
10.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 10-9
10.2.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 10-11
10.3 MWF ..................................................................................................... 10-12
10.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 10-12
10.3.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 10-13
10.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 10-14
10.3.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 10-17
11 Protection Units .......................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 OCP...................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 11-2
11.1.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 11-2
11.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 11-3
11.1.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 11-5
11.2 OLP ...................................................................................................... 11-6
11.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 11-6
11.2.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 11-6
11.2.3 Switching Type ............................................................................. 11-7
11.2.4 Front Panel .................................................................................. 11-8
11.2.5 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 11-10
11.3 SCS ...................................................................................................... 11-11
11.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 11-11
11.3.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 11-11
11.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 11-12
11.3.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 11-14
11.4 PBU ...................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 11-15
11.4.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 11-16
11.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 11-17
11.4.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 11-18
12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication
Unit .................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 SC1/SC2 .............................................................................................. 12-2
12.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 12-2
12.1.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 12-2
12.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 12-3
12.1.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 12-5
12.2 TC1/TC2 ............................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 12-6
12.2.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 12-7
12.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 12-8
12.2.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 12-10
12.3 SCC/SCE ............................................................................................. 12-11
12.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 12-11
12.3.2 Working principle ......................................................................... 12-13
12.3.3 Functional Interfaces .................................................................... 12-13
12.3.4 Front Panel .................................................................................. 12-14
12.3.5 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 12-16
A Indicators ...................................................................................................... A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicators .................................................................................. A-1
A.2 Board Indicators ..................................................................................... A-2
A.2.1 Alarm Indicator .............................................................................. A-2
A.2.2 Running Indicator .......................................................................... A-2
A.2.3 Communication Indicator ............................................................... A-3
B Power Consumption and Weight of the Boards ........................................ B-1

C Glossary ........................................................................................................ C-1

D Acronyms and Abbreviations ..................................................................... D-1

Index .................................................................................................................
OptiX BWS 1600G
Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description

V100R003

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission
System Hardware Description

BOM 31250380

Date June 30, 2006

Document Version T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


Copyright 2006 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means
without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,


TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their
respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Contents

Contents

About This Document......................................................................................................................i


Documentation Set Guide..............................................................................................................v
1 Cabinet .........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Structure ...................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Capacity....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 1-4
2 Power Box ....................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Panel Description......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 DIP Switches ............................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Interface Description ................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.1 SERIAL Interface .............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.4.2 ALARM Interface .............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5 Technical Parameters................................................................................................................... 2-9
3 Subrack.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Structure ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Interface Area .............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Fan Tray Assembly ...................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 3-6
4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame...................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM).................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Functions............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.3 Application......................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4 Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 DCM Frame................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 HUB Frame ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
5 Overview of Boards ...................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Board Category............................................................................................................................ 5-1

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX BWS 1600G
Contents Hardware Description

5.2 Board Appearance ....................................................................................................................... 5-4


6 Optical Transponder Unit ........................................................................................................6-1
6.1 LWF/LWFS ................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 LRF/LRFS ................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 6-9
6.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-11
6.3 LBE/LBES................................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-14
6.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-16
6.4 TMX/TMXS .............................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-19
6.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-21
6.5 TMR/TMRS .............................................................................................................................. 6-24
6.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.5.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-25
6.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.5.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-27
6.6 LWC1 ........................................................................................................................................ 6-29
6.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.6.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-29
6.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-30
6.6.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-32
6.7 TRC1 ......................................................................................................................................... 6-35
6.7.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-35
6.7.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-36
6.7.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.7.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-38
6.8 LWM.......................................................................................................................................... 6-39
6.8.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-39
6.8.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-40

ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Contents

6.8.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-41


6.8.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-42
6.9 LWMR....................................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.9.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.9.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-45
6.9.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.9.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-47
6.10 LWX ........................................................................................................................................ 6-48
6.10.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 6-48
6.10.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 6-49
6.10.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 6-50
6.10.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 6-51
6.11 LWXR...................................................................................................................................... 6-54
6.11.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 6-54
6.11.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 6-54
6.11.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 6-55
6.11.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 6-57
6.12 LDG/FDG................................................................................................................................ 6-59
6.12.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 6-59
6.12.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 6-59
6.12.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 6-60
6.12.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 6-62
6.13 LOG/LOGS ............................................................................................................................. 6-64
6.13.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 6-64
6.13.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 6-65
6.13.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 6-66
6.13.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 6-67
7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit .................................................7-1
7.1 M40 and V40............................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2 D40 .............................................................................................................................................. 7-6
7.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 7-7
7.2.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3 MR2........................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-10

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX BWS 1600G
Contents Hardware Description

7.3.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 7-10


7.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-13
7.4 DWC.......................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.4.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 7-15
7.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.4.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-17
7.5 ITL............................................................................................................................................. 7-19
7.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-19
7.5.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 7-19
7.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.5.4 Parameter Description...................................................................................................... 7-21
7.5.5 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-21
7.6 FIU............................................................................................................................................. 7-22
7.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.6.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 7-23
7.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.6.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-28
8 Optical Amplifier Unit..............................................................................................................8-1
8.1 OAU ............................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 8-3
8.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2 OBU........................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 8-12
8.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 8-14
8.3 OPU ........................................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 8-17
8.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4 HBA........................................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.4.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 8-20
8.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.4.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 8-23

iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Contents

8.5 Raman Amplifier ....................................................................................................................... 8-24


8.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-24
8.5.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 8-25
8.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.5.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 8-27
9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units ....................................................................9-1
9.1 MCA............................................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2 VA4.............................................................................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3 VOA ............................................................................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 9-9
9.3.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-11
9.4 DGE........................................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.4.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 9-12
9.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-15
9.5 DSE ........................................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 9-16
9.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-18
9.6 GFU ........................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.6.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 9-19
9.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-20
9.6.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-22
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units ......................................................................10-1
10.1 FMU ........................................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 10-2

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary v


OptiX BWS 1600G
Contents Hardware Description

10.1.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 10-3


10.1.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 10-5
10.2 MWA ....................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 10-7
10.2.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.2.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 10-11
10.3 MWF ..................................................................................................................................... 10-12
10.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 10-12
10.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................................................ 10-13
10.3.3 Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.3.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 10-17
11 Protection Units ......................................................................................................................11-1
11.1 OCP ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.1.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 11-5
11.2 OLP.......................................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 11-6
11.2.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 11-6
11.2.3 Switching Type............................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.4 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 11-8
11.2.5 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 11-10
11.3 SCS ........................................................................................................................................ 11-11
11.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 11-11
11.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................................................ 11-11
11.3.3 Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 11-12
11.3.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 11-14
11.4 PBU ....................................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 11-15
11.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................................................ 11-16
11.4.3 Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 11-17
11.4.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 11-18
12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit ...............12-1
12.1 SC1/SC2 .................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.1.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.1.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 12-2

vi Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Contents

12.1.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 12-3


12.1.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 12-5
12.2 TC1/TC2.................................................................................................................................. 12-6
12.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 12-6
12.2.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 12-10
12.3 SCC/SCE ............................................................................................................................... 12-11
12.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 12-11
12.3.2 Working principle......................................................................................................... 12-13
12.3.3 Functional Interfaces.................................................................................................... 12-13
12.3.4 Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 12-14
12.3.5 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 12-16
A Indicators .................................................................................................................................. A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicators...................................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 Board Indicators ........................................................................................................................ A-2
A.2.1 Alarm Indicator ................................................................................................................ A-2
A.2.2 Running Indicator ............................................................................................................ A-2
A.2.3 Communication Indicator................................................................................................. A-3
B Power Consumption and Weight of the Boards.................................................................B-1
C Glossary......................................................................................................................................C-1
D Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................... D-1
Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Figures

Figures

Figure 1-1 Appearance of an OptiX BWS 1600G ............................................................................ 1-2


Figure 1-2 Exploded view of an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet .......................................................... 1-3
Figure 2-1 Front view of a power box .............................................................................................. 2-2
Figure 2-2 PMU DIP switches.......................................................................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-3 Alarm cables between a SERIAL interface and the subracks ......................................... 2-5
Figure 2-4 ALARM pins diagram..................................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-5 Alarm cable ..................................................................................................................... 2-8
Figure 3-1 OptiX BWS 1600G subrack structure diagram............................................................... 3-1
Figure 3-2 The subrack interface area .............................................................................................. 3-3
Figure 3-3 Fan tray assembly ........................................................................................................... 3-5
Figure 3-4 Air circulation in the OptiX BWS 1600G subrack ......................................................... 3-6
Figure 4-1 DCM and HUB frames in an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet.............................................. 4-3
Figure 5-1 Board appearance............................................................................................................ 5-4
Figure 6-1 Principle block diagram of the LWF and the LWFS....................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-2 Front panel of the LWF and the LWFS........................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-3 Principle block diagram of the LRF and the LRFS ........................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-4 Front panel of the LRF and the LRFS........................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-5 Principle block diagram of the LBE and the LBES ...................................................... 6-14
Figure 6-6 Front panel of the LBE and the LBES .......................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-7 Principle block diagram of the TMX and the TMXS.................................................... 6-19
Figure 6-8 Front panel of the TMX and the TMXS........................................................................ 6-20
Figure 6-9 Principle block diagram of the TMR and the TMRS .................................................... 6-25
Figure 6-10 Front panel of the TMR and the TMRS ...................................................................... 6-26
Figure 6-11 Principle block diagram of the LWC1......................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-12 Front panel of the LWC1 ............................................................................................ 6-31
Figure 6-13 Principle block diagram of the TRC1 ......................................................................... 6-36

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix


OptiX BWS 1600G
Figures Hardware Description

Figure 6-14 Front panel of the TRC1 ............................................................................................. 6-37


Figure 6-15 Principle block diagram of the LWM ......................................................................... 6-40
Figure 6-16 Front panel of the LWM.............................................................................................. 6-41
Figure 6-17 Principle block diagram of the LWMR....................................................................... 6-45
Figure 6-18 Front panel of the LWMR........................................................................................... 6-46
Figure 6-19 Principle block diagram of the LWX .......................................................................... 6-49
Figure 6-20 Front panel of the LWX .............................................................................................. 6-50
Figure 6-21 Principle block diagram of the LWXR ....................................................................... 6-55
Figure 6-22 Front panel of the LWXR............................................................................................ 6-56
Figure 6-23 Principle block diagram of the LDG........................................................................... 6-60
Figure 6-24 Front panel of the LDG and the FDG ......................................................................... 6-61
Figure 6-25 Principle block diagram of the LOG and the LOGS................................................... 6-65
Figure 6-26 Front panel of the LOG and the LOGS....................................................................... 6-66
Figure 7-1 Principle block diagram of the M40 and the V40 ........................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the M40 and the V40 ............................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-3 Principle block diagram of the D40 ................................................................................ 7-7
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the D40 .................................................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-5 Principle block diagram of the MR2............................................................................. 7-11
Figure 7-6 Front panel of the MR2................................................................................................. 7-12
Figure 7-7 Principle block diagram of the DWC............................................................................ 7-15
Figure 7-8 Front panel of the DWC................................................................................................ 7-16
Figure 7-9 Principle block diagram of the ITL............................................................................... 7-19
Figure 7-10 Front panel of the ITL................................................................................................. 7-20
Figure 7-11 Principle block diagram of the FIU-01/FIU-02........................................................... 7-23
Figure 7-12 Principle block diagram of the FIU-03/06 .................................................................. 7-24
Figure 7-13 Principle block diagram of the FIU-04 ....................................................................... 7-25
Figure 7-14 Front panel of the FIU................................................................................................. 7-26
Figure 8-1 Principle block diagram of the OAU .............................................................................. 8-3
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the E2OAU .............................................................................................. 8-4
Figure 8-3 Front panel of the E3OAU .............................................................................................. 8-5
Figure 8-4 Front panel of the OBU................................................................................................. 8-13
Figure 8-5 Front panel of the OPU ................................................................................................. 8-17

x Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Figures

Figure 8-6 Principle block diagram of the HBA............................................................................. 8-21


Figure 8-7 Front panel of the HBA................................................................................................. 8-22
Figure 8-8 Functional block diagram of the RPA........................................................................... 8-25
Figure 8-9 Front panel of the RPA and RPC................................................................................... 8-26
Figure 9-1 Principle block diagram of the MCA.............................................................................. 9-2
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the MCA-8............................................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9-3 Principle block diagram of the VA4................................................................................ 9-6
Figure 9-4 Front panel of the VA4.................................................................................................... 9-7
Figure 9-5 Principle block diagram of the VOA .............................................................................. 9-9
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the VOA ................................................................................................ 9-10
Figure 9-7 Principle block diagram of the DGE............................................................................. 9-13
Figure 9-8 Front panel of the DGE................................................................................................. 9-14
Figure 9-9 Principle block diagram of the DSE ............................................................................. 9-16
Figure 9-10 Front panel of the DSE-I and the DSE-II.................................................................... 9-17
Figure 9-11 Location of the GFU in the system by working with E2OAU.................................... 9-19
Figure 9-12 Principle block diagram of the GFU ........................................................................... 9-20
Figure 9-13 Front panel of the GFU ............................................................................................... 9-21
Figure 10-1 Application of OAMS in the system (on-line monitoring) ......................................... 10-1
Figure 10-2 Principle block diagram of the FMU .......................................................................... 10-3
Figure 10-3 Front panel of the FMU .............................................................................................. 10-4
Figure 10-4 Principle block diagram of the MWA ......................................................................... 10-8
Figure 10-5 Front panel of the MWA-I and the MWA-II ............................................................... 10-9
Figure 10-6 Principle block diagram of the MWF-I..................................................................... 10-13
Figure 10-7 Principle block diagram of MWF-II ......................................................................... 10-14
Figure 10-8 Front panel of the MWF-I and the MWF-II.............................................................. 10-15
Figure 11-1 Principle block diagram of the OCP ........................................................................... 11-2
Figure 11-2 Front panel of the OCP ............................................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11-3 Principle block diagram of the OLP............................................................................ 11-7
Figure 11-4 Front panel of the OLP................................................................................................ 11-9
Figure 11-5 SCS in the OptiX BWS 1600G ................................................................................. 11-11
Figure 11-6 Principle block diagram of the SCS .......................................................................... 11-12
Figure 11-7 Front panel of the SCS .............................................................................................. 11-13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi


OptiX BWS 1600G
Figures Hardware Description

Figure 11-8 Principle block diagram of the PBU ......................................................................... 11-16


Figure 11-9 Front panel of the PBU ............................................................................................. 11-17
Figure 12-1 Principle block diagram of the SC1 ............................................................................ 12-3
Figure 12-2 Front panel of the SC1 and the SC2............................................................................ 12-4
Figure 12-3 Principle block diagram of the TC1 ............................................................................ 12-8
Figure 12-4 Front panel of the TC1 and the TC2 ........................................................................... 12-9
Figure 12-5 Logical functional block diagram of SCC ................................................................ 12-11
Figure 12-6 Principle block diagram of the SCC ......................................................................... 12-13
Figure 12-7 Front panel of the SCC and the SCE ........................................................................ 12-14

xii Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Tables

Tables

Table 1-1 Full configuration of the 300 mm ETSI cabinets of various heights ................................ 1-4
Table 1-2 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet ............................................. 1-4
Table 2-1 Functions of the units in a power box............................................................................... 2-1
Table 2-2 Description of the power panel......................................................................................... 2-3
Table 2-3 Settings and meanings of DIP switches ............................................................................ 2-4
Table 2-4 ALARM interface pin assignment .................................................................................... 2-7
Table 2-5 ALARM interface pin assignment .................................................................................... 2-8
Table 2-6 Technical parameters of the power box ............................................................................ 2-9
Table 3-1 Dimensions and weight of an OptiX BWS 1600G subrack.............................................. 3-6
Table 4-1 DCM type ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
Table 4-2 Dimensions and weight of a DCM ................................................................................... 4-2
Table 4-3 Dimensions and weight of a DCM frame ......................................................................... 4-3
Table 4-4 Dimensions of a HUB frame ............................................................................................ 4-4
Table 5-1 Board list........................................................................................................................... 5-2
Table 6-1 Comparison between the E2LWF and E3LWF................................................................. 6-4
Table 6-2 Comparison between the E2LWFS and E3LWFS ............................................................ 6-4
Table 6-3 Specifications of the optical module at client side of the LWF ........................................ 6-5
Table 6-4 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWF/LWFS.......... 6-6
Table 6-5 Specifications of the optical module at DWDM side of the LRF or LRFS .................... 6-11
Table 6-6 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LBE/LBES ............. 6-16
Table 6-7 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LBE/LBES ......... 6-17
Table 6-8 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the TMX....................... 6-21
Table 6-9 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the TMX/TMXS ...... 6-22
Table 6-10 Optical interface parameter specifications of the TMR/TMRS .................................... 6-27
Table 6-11 Optical interface parameter specifications at client side of the LWC1 ......................... 6-32
Table 6-12 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWC1............... 6-33

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary xiii


OptiX BWS 1600G
Tables Hardware Description

Table 6-13 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the TRC1................ 6-38
Table 6-14 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LWM .................... 6-42
Table 6-15 Optical interface parameter specifications at DWDM side of the LWM...................... 6-43
Table 6-16 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module at DWDM side of the LWMR ..... 6-47
Table 6-17 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LWX..................... 6-51
Table 6-18 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWX................. 6-52
Table 6-19 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module at DWDM side of the LWXR ...... 6-57
Table 6-20 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LDG/FDG ............ 6-62
Table 6-21 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LDG/FDG ........ 6-63
Table 6-22 Optical interface parameter at the client side of the LOG and LOGS .......................... 6-67
Table 6-23 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LOG/LOGS...... 6-68
Table 7-1 Parameter specifications of FIU-01 (C+L+1510)........................................................... 7-28
Table 7-2 Parameter specifications of FIU-02 (C+L+1510+1625)................................................. 7-29
Table 7-3 Parameter specifications of FIU-03/06 (C+1510) .......................................................... 7-30
Table 7-4 Parameter specifications of FIU-04 (L+1625)................................................................ 7-30
Table 8-1 Parameters of OAU-LG for L-band.................................................................................. 8-6
Table 8-2 Parameters of OAUC01 for C band.................................................................................. 8-8
Table 8-3 Parameters of OAU-C03E for C band .............................................................................. 8-9
Table 8-4 Parameters of OAUC05 for C band................................................................................ 8-10
Table 8-5 Parameters of OBU-L for L-band (for E2OBU) ............................................................. 8-14
Table 8-6 Parameters of OBUC03 and OBUC05 ........................................................................... 8-15
Table 9-1 Parameter specifications of GFU01 and GFU02 (used with E2OAU) ........................... 9-22
Table 9-2 Parameter specifications of GFU03 (used with raman amplifier) .................................. 9-22
Table 9-3 Parameter specifications of GFU04 (used with ROP amplifier)..................................... 9-23
Table A-1 Cabinet indicators ........................................................................................................... A-1
Table A-2 Red alarm indicator ......................................................................................................... A-2
Table A-3 Green running indicator .................................................................................................. A-2
Table A-4 Green running Indicator on the SCC............................................................................... A-2
Table A-5 Orange indicator.............................................................................................................. A-3
Table B-1 OptiX BWS 1600G equipment board information ......................................................... B-1

xiv Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the hardware architecture and composition of the
equipment, including boards, cables, interfaces, as well as their functions and
parameters.

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:

Policy planner
Installation and commissioning engineer
NM configuration engineer
Technical support engineer
Operation engineer
Field engineer

Organisation
This document consists of following chapters and is organised as follows.

Chapter Description

Chapter 1 Cabinet This chapter describes the mechanical structure and technical
specifications of the cabinet.
Chapter 2 Power Box This chapter describes the function and technical
specifications of the power box; and introduces the switches
and interfaces on the front panel of the power box.
Chapter 3 Subrack This chapter describes the mechanical structure, technical
specifications, and interfaces of the subrack.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary i


OptiX BWS 1600G
About This Document Hardware Description

Chapter Description

Chapter 4 DCM This chapter describes the working principle, function, and
Frame and HUB application of the DCM module.
Frame
This chapter describes the structure of the DCM Frame and
the HUB Frame.
Chapter 5 Overview of This chapter describes the classification and appearance of
Boards boards.
Chapter 6 Optical This chapter describes the function and the working principle
Transponder Unit of optical transponder units.
Chapter 7 Optical This chapter describes the function and the working principle
Multiplexer, of optical multiplexers, optical demultiplexers, and optical
Demultiplexer, add/drop multiplexers.
Add/Drop Unit
Chapter 8 Optical This chapter describes the function and the working principle
Amplifier Unit of optical amplifier units.
Chapter 9 This chapter describes the function and the working principle
Performance Detection of performance detection and adjustment units.
and Adjustment Units
Chapter 10 Optical This chapter describes the function and the working principle
Fiber Automatic of optical fiber automatic monitoring units.
Monitoring Units
Chapter 11 Protection This chapter describes the function and the working principle
Units of protection units.
Chapter 12 Optical This chapter describes the function and the working principle
Supervisory Units and of optical supervisory units and system control and
System Control and communication units.
Communication Unit
Appendix A This chapter includes four appendices:
Appendix D
y Indicators
y Power Consumption and Weight of Boards
y Glossary
y Acronyms and Abbreviations
The appendices provide a quick search approach to useful
information.

ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description About This Document

Conventions

Symbol Conventions
Symbol Description

A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could


Warning result in harm to person.
A warning notice with this symbol indicates strong laser beam
Warning could result in personal injury.
A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal
Warning injury.
A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment
Caution damage or loss of data.
A caution notice with this symbol indicates the equipment is
Caution static-sensitive.
Important An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an
Note undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary
information.
Note A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful,
non-critical information.

General Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For
example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Diagram Conventions
Convention Description

Indicates the flow of optical signals.


Indicates the flow of electrical signals.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii


OptiX BWS 1600G
About This Document Hardware Description

Convention Description

Indicates an optical module.

Indicates an electrical module.

All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document
version contains all updates made to the previous versions.

Updates in Document Version T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


Some bugs in version 1.31 are fixed.

The specifications of the boards have been updated.

The description of the AP8, AS8, OCU, OCUS, LQS and RPL have been deleted.

Updates in Document Version T2-042580-20060115-C-1.31


Some bugs in version 1.30 are fixed.

Updates in Document Version T2-042580-20051210-C-1.30


The descriptions of the FDG, LOG, LOGS and DWC boards in this version are
added.

iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Documentation Set Guide

Documentation Set Guide

Documentation Set
This document provides a documentation map to guide you through the
documentation set supplied with your OptiX BWS 1600G equipment or T2000
software package. The document can be used as the starting point for reading your
user documentation. For the details of the T2000, see the documentation set for
the T2000, including printed documents, online help or CD-ROM.

Documentation for OptiX BWS 1600G Documentation for OptiX iManager


T2000
y Installation Guide
y Installation Guide
y Commissioning Guide
y High Availability System Installation
y Configuration Guide Guide
y Routine Maintenance y Administrator Guide
y Troubleshooting y Operator Guide for WDM
y Quick Reference Guide y T2000-LCT User Guide
y Technical Description y System Description for WDM
y Hardware Description y Online Help
y Alarms and Performance Events Reference y Northbound CORBA Interface
y Compliance and Safety Manual Developer Guide

Documentation for OptiX BWS 1600G


This document package contains documents that introduce the theory,
functionality, features, and specifications of the product. In addition, these
documents provide procedure guides for project planning, hardware installation,
commissioning, service configuration, routine maintenance, and troubleshooting.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary v


OptiX BWS 1600G
Documentation Set Guide Hardware Description

The following list provides the short introduction to each document that is
supplied with your package.

Installation Guide

This document provides guides to install the hardware. This document describes
the hardware installation procedure, cable routing and related installation
specifications for the equipment.

Commissioning Guide

This document provides guides to practice the commissioning and testing


operations after hardware installation. This document describes the preparation,
methods and procedures for the station commissioning and the network
commissioning.

Configuration Guide

This document provides guides to configure the services on the T2000 after
network commissioning is complete. This document describes how to configure
optical network element, service protection, IPA, APE and ALC.

Routine Maintenance

This document provides guides to practice routine maintenance. This document


describes the detailed routine maintenance activities and precautions, including
hardware maintenance items and equipment maintenance items on the T2000.

Troubleshooting

This document provides guides to operate the troubleshooting. This document


describes the basic thoughts and operations of troubleshooting. In this document,
procedures detailing board replacing methods are included.

Quick Reference Guide

This document provides guides for field engineers to conduct on-site maintenance.
This document describes basic operational and maintenance information covering
the majority of day to day activities that will be carried out at a network element.

Technical Description

This document describes the functions, features, specifications and network


application of the equipment. This document provides both introductory
information and detailed interface parameters.

Hardware Description

This document describes hardware architecture and composition of the equipment,


including boards, cables, interfaces, as well as their functions and parameters.

vi Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Documentation Set Guide

Alarms and Performance Events Reference

This document lists alarms and performance events generated by the equipment. It
also provides ways of handling alarms and performance events to clear the faults
or failures.

Compliance and Safety Manual

The Compliance and Safety Manual provides compliance and safety information.

Documentation for OptiX iManager T2000


This document package contains procedure guides for T2000 installation,
operation, and equipment maintenance through T2000.

Installation Guide

This document provides guides to install the T2000 software system. This
document describes the installation procedure of database, client and server of the
T2000 software system.

High Availability System Installation Guide

This document provides guides to install, to operate and maintain the High
Availability System. Detailed procedures, normal operations, and common faults
are given. Three types of user documents are available for the Sun Cluster,
Watchman, Veritas depending on the requirement of project.

Administrator Guide

This document provides guides to manage and maintain the T2000. Normal
operations and common faults are given.

Operator Guide for WDM

This document provides guides to monitor, configure, maintain, and manage a


piece of equipment through the T2000.

T2000-LCT User Guide

This document is shipped with the OptiX iManager T2000-LCT. This document
provides guides to install the T2000-LCT, to manage and maintain a piece of
equipment through the T2000-LCT.

System Description for WDM

This document describes the position, functional characteristics, system


architecture and networking mode of the T2000, appended with standards that the
T2000 complies with, abbreviations and performance indexes.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii


OptiX BWS 1600G
Documentation Set Guide Hardware Description

Online Help

This document provides guides to use the T2000. This document describes the
functionality, menu and interface parameters of the T2000 and how to monitor,
configure, maintain and manage a piece of equipment through the T2000.

Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide

This document provides guides to use the T2000CORBA interface. Functions,


features, installation and maintenance information are given.

Use Phases
See the following table to use desired documents according to the phases and user
profiles.

Document Name Intended Audience

Planning Installation & Configuration Maintenance


Commissioning

Installation Guide I&C, T&S - - F, I&C


Commissioning Guide - I&C NM-R F, I&C
T2000 Installation Guide Note 1 - I&C, T&S NM-C -
T2000 HA System Installation - I&C, T&S NM-C -
Guide Note 1 Note 2
Configuration Guide P - NM-C, T&S NM-R
T2000 Operation Guide for - I&C NM-C, T&S NM-R, T&S, O
WDM Note 1
T2000- LCT User Guide Note 1 - I&C NM-C, T&S NM-R, T&S, O
T2000 On-line Help Note 1 Note 3 - - NM-C, T&S NM-R, T&S, O
Quick Reference Guide - - - F
Routine Maintenance - - - NM-R, F, T&S,
O
Troubleshooting - - - NM-R, T&S, O
Alarms and Performance Events - - - NM-R, T&S, O
Reference
Technical Description P I&C NM-C T&S
Hardware Description P I&C NM-C T&S, O, F
T2000 System Description for P I&C NM-C, O T&S
WDMNote 1

viii Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Documentation Set Guide

Document Name Intended Audience

Planning Installation & Configuration Maintenance


Commissioning

Compliance and Safety Manual - T&S - T&S


F: Field engineer P: Policy planning
O: Operation engineer I&C: Installation and commissioning engineer
T&S: Technical support engineer NM-R: NM real time engineer
B: Build and acceptance engineer NM-C: NM configuration engineer
Note 1: These documents are for NM and should be delivered with the NM software.
Note 2: The Optical iManager T2000 HA System User Guide should be delivered with the user
documentation of the Sun Cluster, Watchman or Veritas depending on the project.
Note 3: The OptiX iManager T2000 on-line help is integrated in the system, providing comprehensive
operation guide.

Version Control
The documentation version is displayed as:

T2 - 04XXXX - yyyymmdd - C - 1.10


Doc. version

Confidentiality level
Publishing date
Internal code
Code for transmission
English version

If the version is updated, then the last Doc. version 1.10 will be changed to 1.11,
and the Publishing date will be updated.

Safety Information
For safety and warning information, see OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM
Optical Transmission System Compliance and Safety Manual shipped with the
product. This document lists EMC and other safety standards that the OptiX BWS
1600G complies with, and provides safety precautions that should be followed
during the installation and maintenance of the OptiX BWS 1600G.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix


OptiX BWS 1600G
Documentation Set Guide Hardware Description

Distribution
The documentation set for the OptiX BWS 1600G is shipped with the hardware
product, in printed and CD-ROM.

The documentation set for the NM is shipped with the OptiX iManager T2000,
including printed document, online help and CD-ROM.

Feedback on Documentation
Your suggestions and comments are welcome. Please email us at
support@huawei.com.

x Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet

1 Cabinet

An OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System


(hereinafter called the OptiX BWS 1600G for short) comprises:
Cabinet
Subrack
Power box
Fan tray assembly (including air filter)
Dispersion compensation module (DCM) frame
HUB frame
See Figure 1-1. A cabinet can hold subracks with different board combinations to
form diverse types of the OptiX BWS 1600G.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
1 Cabinet Hardware Description

Figure 1-1 Appearance of an OptiX BWS 1600G

1.1 Structure
An OptiX BWS 1600G system adopts an ETS300-119-3 standard cabinet. Hence,
the system is rational in cabinet structure and graceful in appearance.
The main frame of the cabinet is a rack, with a rear panel fixed at the back and
movable side panels at both sides. The power box is mounted at the top. The
subracks are installed in the middle of the cabinet.
For the exploded view of a cabinet of an OptiX BWS 1600G, see Figure 1-2.
The cabinet features the following:
The cabinet has a front door.
The cabinet leaves much space for routing and managing optical fibres and
cables.
Two movable side panels are installed at both sides of the cabinet. Each side
panel can move in or move out along a slide rail on the top and the bottom of
the cabinet.
Air vents are provided at the front door of the subrack, the rear panel and
upper enclosure frame of the cabinet to ensure heat dissipation.

1-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet

Power box

Rear panel

Subrack

Column

DCM and
HUB frames
Side panel

Front door

Figure 1-2 Exploded view of an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
1 Cabinet Hardware Description

1.2 Capacity
The rational cabinet structure makes the OptiX BWS 1600G highly integrated. For
the full configuration of the 300 mm ETSI cabinets of various heights, refer to
Table 1-1. If the cabinet is not fully configured, the subracks are installed from
bottom to top.

Table 1-1 Full configuration of the 300 mm ETSI cabinets of various heights
Height of Quantity of Quantity of Quantity of Quantity of
the cabinet power boxes subracks DCM frames HUB frames

1.8 m 1 2 1 1
2.0 m 1 2 1 1
2.2 m 1 3 1 1
2.6 m 1 3 2 1

1.3 Parameters
There are four types of cabinets with different heights. Type 1 and type 2 can hold
up to 3 subracks. . And type 3 and type 4 can hold up to 2 subracks.
Cabinet dimensions and weight:

Table 1-2 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet
Cabinet Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg)

Type 1 2,200 600 300 69


Type 2 2,600 600 300 78
Type 3 1800 600 300 58
Type 4 2000 600 300 64

Working power supply: 38.4 V to 57.6 V DC (48 V nominal), or 48.0 V


to 72.0 V DC (60 V nominal)
Maximum power consumption of a type 1 or a type 2 cabinet (full
configuration with 3 subracks): 2000 W
Maximum power consumption of a type 3 or a type 4 cabinet (full
configuration with 2 subracks): 1300 W

1-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 2 Power Box

2 Power Box

A power box for an OptiX BWS 1600G is mounted at the top of a cabinet. The
power box provides standard 48 V DC or 60 V DC to the cabinet. It is a closed
structure with all user interfaces placed on its front panel. A pluggable lightning
protection device is adopted, easy for operation and maintenance.

2.1 Functions
A power box is mainly used to access two independent 48 V DC inputs or two
independent 60 V DC inputs. It distributes reliable power supply to the units of the
equipment.
For the function of each unit in a power box, refer to Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Functions of the units in a power box


Unit Abbreviation Function

Power PDU y Provides power distribution.


distribution unit y Protects the system from lightning.
Power PMU y Generates ringing current.
monitoring unit y Monitors ringing current, 48 V/60 V DC
voltage and temperature in the power box.
y Accesses 16 external alarms and output 4
channels of alarms.
y Provides low-voltage protection.
y Controls cabinet indicators and SCC
communication.
Power PMC y Supplies working voltage to the PMU.
monitoring y Provides two lines of testing voltages.
connection board
Power output A magnetic circuit breaker used to control the
switch matched power outputs. Refer to Table 2-3 for
details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
2 Power Box Hardware Description

A PMU board is the main part of a power box. The board has the following
functions:
Generating ringing current
Provides ringing current for orderwire.
Monitoring ringing current
Test whether the ringing current for orderwire is normal, and reports the alarm
information such as invalid ringing current.
Monitoring voltage
A PMU monitors the input voltage of two 48 V/60 V power. The PMU also
reports the voltage value and voltage alarms. The alarms include over- and
under-voltage alarms. For an alarming threshold, you may take the default value in
the system, or set a value according to your requirement. In different application
environment, the voltage alarming thresholds can be set as:
Over-voltage threshold: 60 V 1 V for nominal 48 V DC, or 71 V 1 V for
nominal 60 V DC.
Under-voltage threshold: 41 1 V for nominal 48 V DC, or 51 V 1V for
nominal 60 V DC.
Monitoring temperature
A temperature sensor in the power box monitors the temperature. Note that the
sensor measures the ambient temperature inside the power box, not that of the
subracks or boards.
Monitoring alarms
One PMU can monitor 16 external alarm inputs and 4 equipment alarms. The PMU
outputs the alarms occurred and supervises the external environment.

2.2 Panel Description


For the front view of a power box, see Figure 2-1.
3 4 6 9 10 11

2 0A 20 A 20A 2A 20A 20A 20 A 2A

RTN(+) NEG(-) RTN(+) NEG(-)

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 AUX OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 AUX

ON ON ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF O FF O FF OFF O FF ALARM SERIAL


RUN RUN TEST RUN

PO W ER IN SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 POW ER IN SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 MU TE AL M
AL M ALM
PMU
PDU PDU

1 2 5 7 8 12

Figure 2-1 Front view of a power box

2-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 2 Power Box

For the functions of each item in Figure 2-1, refer to Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 Description of the power panel


Marking Function unit Function

1 Power distribution Provides power distribution and protects the system


unit (PDU) from lightning.
2 RUN and ALM Serves as the running indicator and the alarm
indicators on PDU indicator of the PDU.
3 Protection Leads in the PGND cable.
grounding screws
4 Input cable terminals Leads in 48V/60V power cables and BGND
cables.
5 Three power SW1 Controls power supply of the upper
distribution switches subrack. The output port of SW 1 is
OUT1
SW2 Control power supply of the middle
subrack. The output port of SW 2 is
OUT2
SW3 Control power supply of the lower
subrack. The output port of SW 3 is
OUT3
6 Output cable Leads in the power cables connected to the subracks
terminal (20A), HUB (2A) and COA (2A).
7 TEST switch Serves for audio/visual alarm test. Usually, the
switch is in the lower state. When the switch is in the
upper state, the green, yellow and red indicators on
the cabinet top flash, and a buzzer buzzes. If so, the
alarm system is normal.
8 MUTE switch Serves for muting the audio alarm. When the switch
is in down position, the audio alarm is shut down
completely. When there is a critical alarm, no audio
alarm is given off. Normally, this switch is required
to be in up position.
9 ALARM interface Serves as the interface for alarm input, alarm output
and alarm cascade.
10 SERIAL interface Serves as the interface for subrack communication.
11 PMU Serves as the power monitoring unit.
12 RUN and ALM Serves as the running indicator and the alarm
indicators on PMU indicator of the PMU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
2 Power Box Hardware Description

2.3 DIP Switches


For the DIP switches on a PMU board, see Figure 2-2.
ON ON ON ON

1 2 3 4

Figure 2-2 PMU DIP switches

Below lists the function of each DIP switch.


DIP switch 1 and DIP switch 2 are used to set communication with a certain
subrack.
The settings of the two switches decide which subrack the PMU communicates
with. The default setting is that the PMU communicates with the lower subrack.
The PMU reports information such as environment variables and voltage to the
SCC of the subrack. The SCC further reports the information to the T2000.
For the settings and meanings of DIP switches, see Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Settings and meanings of DIP switches


DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 PMU communicates with

ON ON Upper subrack
ON OFF Middle subrack
OFF ON Lower subrack
OFF OFF No communication

Note
The DIP switch is ON when in up position, and OFF when in down position.

DIP switch 3 is used to control the cabinet indicators.


The DIP switch 3 needs to work with the related hosts. By default, the switch is set
to ON (in up position). In some special zones, the DIP switch is set to OFF (in
down position).
DIP switch 4 is used to set the power system used.
When the DIP switch 4 is OFF, the working voltage is 48 V DC. When the switch
is ON, the working voltage is 60 V DC. The default state is OFF.

2-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 2 Power Box

2.4 Interface Description


The PMU in the power box fulfils alarm output, input and cascade functions. In the
PMU, ALARM is an interface for the external alarms, while SERIAL for the
internal alarms.

2.4.1 SERIAL Interface


A SERIAL is a communication interface between the PMU and the subrack in the
cabinet. The SERIAL is also an interface for driving signal of the cabinet indicator.
For the cables between a SERIAL interface and the subracks, see Figure 2-3.
Cable W1 is connected with the upper subrack, W2 with the middle subrack and
W3 with the lower subrack. W4 is a cable for driving green, red and orange
indicators at the cabinet top.

Figure 2-3 Alarm cables between a SERIAL interface and the subracks

There are two types of alarms in a cabinet of the transmission equipment:


Visual alarm: including red indicator alarm (critical) and yellow indicator
alarm (major).
Audio alarm: given off by a buzzer. Audio alarm is triggered by critical
alarms.
When the SCC board gives out a critical alarm signal, the red indicator flashes and
the buzzer buzzes. The MUTE switch at the cabinet top or the ALC switch of the
SCC board controls the buzz sound.

2.4.2 ALARM Interface


The transmission equipment outputs the alarm signal of the cabinet to the
centralised alarming system.
The power box provides four alarm outputs, one for major alarm, one for critical
alarm, and the other two for auxiliary Boolean value. If the centralised alarming
system is in audio alarm mode, the alarm mute function is required.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5


OptiX BWS 1600G
2 Power Box Hardware Description

The alarm signal is led out from the ALARM interface of the PMU.
For the diagram of pins (DB50) of an ALARM interface, see Figure 2-4.
For the assignment of the pins, see Table 2-4.
For the usage of the pins, see Table 2-5.

26
1

27
2

28
3

29
4

30
5

31
6

32
7

33
8

34
9

35
10

36
11

37
12
13

38
39
14

40
15

41
16

42
17

43
18

44
19

45
20

46
21

47
22

48
23

49
24

50
25

Figure 2-4 ALARM pins diagram

2-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 2 Power Box

Table 2-4 ALARM interface pin assignment


PIN No. Definition PIN No. Definition

1 RELAY1 34 ALMOUT1
3 RELAY2 35 ALMOUT1
5 RELAY3 36 ALMOUT2
7 RELAY4 37 ALMOUT2
9 RELAY5 38 ALMOUT3
11 RELAY6 39 ALMOUT3
13 RELAY7 40 ALMOUT4
15 RELAY8 41 ALMOUT4
17 RELAY9 42 ALMOUT5
19 RELAY10 43 ALMOUT5
21 RELAY11 44 ALMOUT6
23 RELAY12 45 ALMOUT6
26 RELAY13 46 ALMOUT7
28 RELAY14 47 ALMOUT7
30 RELAY15 48 ALMOUT8
32 RELAY16 49 ALMOUT8
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, GND 25, 50 Undefined
20, 22, 24, 27, 29, 31, 33

Note
Each pin with a RELAY code is in pair with a GND cable that has a PIN code larger
by 1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7


OptiX BWS 1600G
2 Power Box Hardware Description

Table 2-5 ALARM interface pin assignment


Pin name Usage

ALMOUT1 and ALMOUT2 Major alarm Boolean output


ALMOUT3 and ALMOUT4 Critical alarm Boolean output
ALMOUT5 and ALMOUT6 Output of auxiliary alarm Boolean 1
ALMOUT7 and ALMOUT8 Output of auxiliary alarm Boolean 2
RELAY1-16 Input of external 16 channels of Boolean

Note
When an alarm occurs, two alarm values are output at the same time, one to the W2
interface, the other to the W3 interface, as shown in Figure 2-5, so as to cascade the
alarm signals.

If several cabinets are installed side by side, the alarms of these cabinets can be
cascaded. One end of externally connected alarm cable contains a DB50 connector,
while the other end has three branches. These three branches contain two alarm
output/alarm cascade connectors (DB9) and one external alarm input connector
(DB37) See Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 Alarm cable

In Figure 2-5, W2 and W3 are alarm output/cascade cables, W1 is the alarm input
cable. The alarm signals are cascaded among cabinets through W2 and W3. The last
cabinet transmits the signals to the centralised alarming system.

2-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 2 Power Box

Caution
As an alarm output or cascade interface is a DB9 male connector, a 3-m cable with
DB9 female connectors on both ends is needed to cascade the alarm signals of two
cabinets.

The power box provides 16 input interfaces for external alarms. The alarm input
function is intended for remote monitoring of the alarms from an external system
(such as an environment monitoring system). You may name the 16 inputs of
alarms for easy remote monitoring.
External alarm input includes door access, smoke and other environmental factors.
In other words, the external alarm input accesses the environmental alarms in the
equipment room for centralised monitoring.
Before displaying an external alarm on the T2000 server, you may process the
alarm with software program to determine whether the alarm is valid.
W1 is an external alarm input connector, also a DB37 female connector. A 10-m
alarm input cable (DB37 connector on one end and the other end reserved) is
connected to the W1 cable to allow external alarm input.

Caution
The transmission system cannot monitor the external alarms independently. The
system must co-work with an external environment monitoring system of the
customer.

2.5 Technical Parameters


Table 2-6 Technical parameters of the power box
Item Technical parameters of the power box

Dimensions 100 mm (H) 400 mm (W) 258 mm (D)


Input rated current 65 A
Weight 9 kg

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

3 Subrack

3.1 Structure
A subrack of an OptiX BWS 1600G comprises three parts:
Upper part: an interface area that accesses all kinds of electrical signals.
Middle part: a board area.
Lower part: a fibre cabling area and a fan area.
For the structure of the subrack, see Figure 3-1.

5 6 7 8

1. Interface area 2. Beam 3. Board area 4. Fibre spool


5. Fibre laying area 6. Fan tray assembly 7. Subrack front door 8. Hook
Figure 3-1 OptiX BWS 1600G subrack structure diagram

Interface area

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
3 Subrack Hardware Description

All external interfaces are located in this area, including the interfaces for subrack
power supply, NM and orderwire telephone, and so on.
The interface area also works as a heat dissipation outlet of the subrack. The
orderwire telephone can be installed under the beam in this area.
Board area
Totally 13 slots are available, numbered IU1, IU2, IU3 IU13 from left to right
when you face the front surface of the subrack. Slot IU7 is for SCC or SCE board
and is 24-mm wide. Other slots are 38-mm wide.
All optical interfaces are located on these standard G-type front panels. Most
optical interfaces are of LC/PC type, while the LINE, EXT and OUT optical
interfaces on the front panel of the Raman amplifier unit are of E2000/APC type.
Fibre cabling area
All the optical fibres from the optical interfaces are routed to this area. These
optical fibres then come out of this area and reach the matched side of the subrack.
There are fibre spools at the two sides of the subrack. These spools allow good
management over the optical fibres.
Mechanical variable optical attenuator (VOA) is installed here.
Fan tray assembly
This area contains a fan tray and an air filter. The air filter is fixed beneath the fan
tray . The fans and air filter ensure a dust-free environment with normal
temperature.
Front door
The front door is intended for equipment protection and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC). The inner side of the front door is equipped with hooks to
hold the screws for adjusting the mechanical VOA.
Backplane
The backplane is located at the back of the subrack. The system depends on the
service bus of the backplane to connect all modules. This enables the system to
fulfill functions of data bus, clock bus, communication bus, overhead bus and some
control buses.
Fibre spools
The fibre spools serve to coil the slack of the optical fibre.

3-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

3.2 Interface Area


For the subrack interface area of an OptiX BWS 1600G, see Figure 3-2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

ETHERNET1 ETHERNET1 CLKIN CLKOUT OCU CLKIN


1 2 1 2 3

3 4 5 6
F&f Serial 1 Serial 2 ALM F1 OAM
PHONE1 PHONE2 POWER1 POWER2

PHONE3

14

1. ETHERNET1 2. ETHERNET2 3.CLKIN 4. CLKOUT 5. OCU CLKIN


6. F& f 7. Serial1 8. Serial2 9. ALM 10. F1
11. OAM 12. POWER1 13. POWER2 14. PHONE
Figure 3-2 The subrack interface area

ETHERNET1 interface (RJ45 connector): serves as the TMN interface and


local NE management interface.
ETHERNET2 interface (RJ45 connector): serves as the internal
communication interface for functions among subracks, such as Automatic
Level Control (ALC) and Automatic Power Equilibrium (APE).

Note
The two ETHERNET interfaces in the subrack interface area serve for
communication between SCCs. But the communication contents of the two
interfaces are different.
(1) The ETHERNET1 interface serves for extended ECC function. That is, the
ETHERNET1 interfaces of all subracks in an OTM, OLA or OADM are connected
to the HUB through straight-through network cables to communicate with the
T2000 server.
(2) The ETHERNET2 interface serves for special network functions among
subracks. The boards with such functions as ALC and APE may not belong to the
same subrack. The boards communicate through internal protocols. Hence, the
ETHERNET2 interface of each subrack are connected through a straight-through
network cable (if only two subracks are involved) or connected to another HUB, to
communicate among subracks.
(3) ETHERNET 1 and ETHERNET 2 are non-interchangeable.

CLKIN 13 interfaces (SMB sockets)

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
3 Subrack Hardware Description

CLKIN 13 interfaces offer three external clock input interfaces.


CLKOUT 16 interfaces (SMB sockets)
CLKOUT 16 interfaces offer six network clock output interfaces.
OCU CLKIN interfaces (SMB sockets)
OCU CLKIN interfaces offer two external clock source interfaces to the
OCU board. These two clock interfaces are connected internally and only one
external clock can be accessed.
F&f interface (DB9 connector)
An F&f interface has all the features of RS-232 interface. The F&f only
serves as an interface for software internal testing.
Serial 1 & serial 2 interfaces (DB9 connector)
Serial 1 & serial 2 interfaces enjoy the features of both RS-232 and RS-422
interfaces. Serial 1 uses F2 byte and serial 2 uses F3 byte. The maximum
throughput is 19200 bit/s.
ALM interface (DB9 connector)
An ALM interface serves for subrack alarms output The ALM communicates
with the PMU board located in the power box. The ALM is connected with
the subrack communication interface (SERIAL) on the power box panel.
F1 interface (DB9 connector)
An F1 interface serves as a 64 kbit/s codirectional data interface.
OAM interface (DB9 connector)
An OAM interface serves as a local NE management interface.
POWER1 and POWER2 (plug-in connectors)
POWER1 and POWER2 interfaces provide two subrack power supply input
interfaces, backup to each other.
PHONE1-3 (RJ-45 connectors)
PHONE1-3 interfaces are orderwire phone interfaces that use the OSC bytes
E1 and E2.

3-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 3 Subrack

3.3 Fan Tray Assembly


Each subrack contains a fan tray assembly that consists of a fan tray and an air filter.
The air filter can be extracted directly for cleaning.
The fan tray and the air filter are installed at the lower part of the subrack, located
under the fibre laying area. The air filter is hung under the fan tray and the two parts
form as a whole. See Figure 3-3.

2
3
4
5

1. Fans (six in total) 2. Air filter 3. Pulled handle


4. Fan running indicators (six in total) 5. Alarm indicator 6. Connector
Figure 3-3 Fan tray assembly

The fan tray assembly is directly inserted to the backplane through connectors. The
backplane provides 48 V/60 V DC for the fan tray assembly.
There are six green indicators on the front panel of the fan tray assembly. These
indicators show the running statuses of the six fans.
Because of abundant optical devices and large power consumption, the cooling and
ventilation system of an OptiX BWS 1600G is critical.
For the air circulation of the entire subrack, see Figure 3-4.
The air inlet is located in the lower part of the subrack, while the air outlet is located
in the subrack interface area. Such a design forms a good cooling and ventilation
system and allows the normal running of the equipment.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5


OptiX BWS 1600G
3 Subrack Hardware Description

Air outlet
Interface area

Board area

Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly

Air inlet

The dotted line shows the airflow path and the direction of the airflow.
Figure 3-4 Air circulation in the OptiX BWS 1600G subrack

3.4 Parameters
Dimensions and weight:

Table 3-1 Dimensions and weight of an OptiX BWS 1600G subrack


Subrack Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg)
Parameters
625 495 291 18 (empty subrack)

Maximum power consumption (in full configuration): 650W

3-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame

4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame

4.1 Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM)


4.1.1 Working Principle
A G.652 or a G.655 fiber has positive dispersion coefficient and positive dispersion
slope at 1550-nm window.
After the optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the accumulation of
positive dispersion widens the optical signal pulse. This seriously affects the system
transmission performance. To minimize such an effect, a passive DCM is used in
the network.
A DCM uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of a
transmitting fiber, so as to keep the original shape of the signal pulse.

4.1.2 Functions
The OptiX BWS 1600G system provides various DCMs for C-band and L-band.
Refer to the table below Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 DCM type


Band Applicable for DCMs

C-band G.652 fiber DCM (5), DCM (20), DCM (40), DCM (60), DCM
(80), and DCM (100)
C-band G.655 fiber DCM (20), DCM (40), DCM (60), DCM (80), and
DCM (100)
L-band G.652 fiber DCM (20), DCM (40), DCM (60), and DCM (80)

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame Hardware Description

Note
The numbers in the above brackets refer to the typical dispersion compensation
distance (in km) of the DCM.

4.1.3 Application
The dispersion coefficient of a G.652 fiber is large, while that of a G.655 fiber is
small. A DCM can be installed on an optical amplifier unit at the transmit end or
receive end according to the actual situation.

Note
The OptiX BWS 1600G-V system is a pure 2.5 Gbit/s system. Because the
dispersion tolerance is large, DCM is not required.

4.1.4 Parameters
Table 4-2 Dimensions and weight of a DCM
Module Dimensions Weight

DCM 44 mm (H) x 238 mm (W) x 266 mm (D) 3.5 kg

4.2 DCM Frame


A DCM frame is mounted on the lowest part of the cabinet with mounting brackets
and screws. See Figure 4-1. At most, two DCMs can be placed into one DCM frame.
For the dimensions and weight of a DCM frame, refer to Table 4-3.

4-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame

2 H

D W
3
4
5

1. DCM frame 2. Case 3. DCM 4. HUB tray 5. HUB


Figure 4-1 DCM and HUB frames in an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet

Table 4-3 Dimensions and weight of a DCM frame


Module Dimensions

DCM frame 48 mm (H) x 282 mm (D) x 530 mm (W)

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame Hardware Description

4.3 HUB Frame


A HUB is required in a station with multiple subracks. The HUB ports connect with
the network ports in interface area of every subrack through network cables. This
realizes the communications between subracks, as well as the expanded ECC
function. A HUB is powered by a power box on the top of a cabinet where the HUB
and power box locate.
A HUB is located in a HUB frame that is in the lowest position of the cabinet. The
HUB frame is right under the DCM frame. See Figure 4-1.
A HUB frame comprises two parts: a box body and a HUB tray. The box body is
attached to the cabinet with mounting brackets and screws. The HUB tray is
removable, easy for daily use and maintenance. For the dimensions of a HUB
frame, refer to Table 4-4.

Table 4-4 Dimensions of a HUB frame


Module Dimensions

HUB frame 43 mm (H) x 255 mm (D) x 434 mm (W)

Caution
During a routine maintenance, if the HUB tray is required to be extracted, turn the
front door outward first. See Figure 4-1.

4-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 5 Overview of Boards

5 Overview of Boards

5.1 Board Category


The OptiX BWS 1600G system has the following board categories:
Optical transponder unit
Optical multiplexing, demultiplexing, add/drop multiplexing unit
Optical amplifier unit
Performance detection and adjustment unit
Optical fibre automatic monitoring unit
Protection unit
Optical supervisory channel unit
System control & communication unit

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
5 Overview of Boards Hardware Description

Table 5-1 Board list


Board category Board name Board description

Optical transponder (E2) LWF STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with FEC
unit (Note 1) function

(E2) LWFS STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with FEC
function (Super WDM)
LRF STM-64 line regenerating wavelength conversion unit with FEC
function
LRFS STM-64 line regenerating wavelength conversion unit with FEC
function( Super WDM)
LBE Transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for 10GE (LAN)
LBES Transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for 10GE (LAN)
(Super WDM)
(E3) LWF STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with
AFEC function
(E3) LWFS STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with
AFEC function (Super WDM)
TMR 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board with AFEC
and G.709
TMRS 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board with AFEC
and G.709 (Super WDM)
TMX 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2 wavelength
conversion board
TMXS 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2 wavelength
conversion board (Super WDM)
LWC1 STM-16 line wavelength conversion unit (compliant with G.709)
TRC1 STM-16 optical transmitting regenerator (compliant with G.709)
LWM Multi-rate optical wavelength conversion board
LWMR Multi-rate optical wavelength conversion relay board
LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit
LWXR Arbitrary bit rate regenerating board
LDG 2 Gigabit Ethernet unit
FDG 2-port Gigabit Ethernet Wavelength Conversion Board With FEC
LOG 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion
board

5-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 5 Overview of Boards

Board category Board name Board description

LOGS 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion


board (Super WDM)
Optical M40 40-channel multiplexing unit
multiplexing/
demultiplexing unit D40 40-channel demultiplexing unit
or optical add/drop V40 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
multiplexing unit
MR2 2-channel optical add/drop unit
DWC Dynamic Wavelength Control Unit
ITL Interleaver unit
FIU Fibre interface unit
Optical amplifier OAU Optical amplifier unit
unit
OBU Optical booster board
OPU Optical preamplifier board
HBA High-power optical booster amplifier board
RPC Raman pump amplifier unit for c-band
RPA Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band and L-band
ROP Remote Optical Pump
Performance MCA Multi-channel spectrum analyser unit
detection and
adjustment unit VA4 4-channel variable optical attenuator board
VOA Variable optical attenuator unit
DGE Dynamic gain equalizer board
DSE Dispersion slope equilibrium board
GFU Gain flatness unit
Optical fibre FMU Fiber measure unit board
automatic
monitoring unit MWA Measure wavelength access board
MWF Measure wavelength filter board
Protection unit OLP Optical line protection unit
OCP Optical channel protection board
SCS Synchronization optical channel separator unit
PBU Power backup board
Optical supervisory SC1 Single Directional Optical Supervising Channel unit

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
5 Overview of Boards Hardware Description

Board category Board name Board description


channel unit SC2 Dual Directional Optical Supervising Channel unit
TC1 Unidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transporting
unit
TC2 Bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transporting
unit
System control & SCC System control and communication board
communication unit
SCE System control and communication unit for the extended subrack
Note 1: The brackets before the board name shows the hardware version of this board.

5.2 Board Appearance


A board is inserted in the board area of a subrack.
See Figure 5-1.

1. Screw 2. Ejector lever 3. Indicator 4. Fiber interface 5. Guide pin


Figure 5-1 Board appearance

Board dimensions:
321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)
Front panel dimensions:
345 mm (H) x 114 mm (W)
345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)

5-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 5 Overview of Boards

345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)


345 mm (H) x 24 mm (W)

Note
The following figure shows the directions of the height, the width, the depth and
the thickness.
Height (H): frontal dimension
Width (W): frontal dimension
Depth (D): PCB size dimension
Thickness (T): PCB size dimension
H
W(T) D

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-5


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

6 Optical Transponder Unit

This chapter describes the optical transponder units (OTUs) of the OptiX BWS
1600G in terms of:
Functionality
Working principle
Front panel
Technical specifications

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

6.1 LWF/LWFS
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the LWF board
and the LWFS board.
The LWF and the LWFS are the same in function and mechanism, but are different
in encoding mode.

6.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWF and the LWFS.

Functionality Description

LWF LWFS

Basic function y Accesses STM-64/OC-192 optical signal at the client side.


y Converts the signal into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
Encoding mode Supports non return to zero (NRZ) Supports chirped return to zero (CRZ)
encoding. encoding.
The use of CRZ encoding increases the
system tolerance to OSNR and extends the
transmission distance.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical
function module.
The output DWDM wavelength of
the module is tunable between 192.1
THz and 196.05 THz, totally 80
wavelengths at an interval of 50
GHz.
FEC function There are two types of LWF boards:
y E2LWF that adopts the FEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.
y E3LWF that adopts the AFEC encoding compliant with ITU-T G.975.1.
Overhead processing Supports protocol overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.
ESC function Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission.
Alarms and Monitors B1,B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
performance events Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
monitoring
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

6-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Functionality Description

LWF LWFS

Protection schemes Supports 1:N optical channel protection, inter board 1+1 optical channel
protection.

6.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-1 shows the principle block diagram of the LWF and the LWFS.

Client side WDM side

STM-64/OC-192 Optical transponder module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-1 Principle block diagram of the LWF and the LWFS

The working principle of the LWF is described as follows.


At the client side:
The optical transponder module of the LWF receives STM-64/OC-192 signals. It
processes and encodes the signals, and outputs ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM
signals by its optical transmitter.
At the DWDM side:
The LWF receives ITU-T G.694.1-compliant optical signals. The optical
transponder module then processes the signals, and outputs the original
STM-64/OC-192 signals.
The encoding and decoding in the above processes comply with ITU-T
G.975/G.975.1 and support overhead processing in compliance with ITU-T G.709.
The board takes measures for jitter suppression. Also, the board monitors the
related performance parameters and alarm signals.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Table 6-1 Comparison between the E2LWF and E3LWF


Board Supports Regenerated board

E2LWF G.975-compliant FEC LRF


E3LWF G.975.1-compliant AFEC TMR

Table 6-2 Comparison between the E2LWFS and E3LWFS


Board kind Supports Regenerated board

E2LWFS G.975-compliant FEC LRFS


E3LWFS G.975.1-compliant AFEC TMRS

6.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the LWF and the LWFS.

LWF LWFS

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

TX OUT TX OUT

RX IN
IN RX IN
IN

Figure 6-2 Front panel of the LWF and the LWFS

6-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWF or the LWFS.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWF or the LWFS.

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to


receive DWDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to
transmit DWDM signal.
Tx LC Transmits service signals to the client side.
Rx LC Receives service signals from the client side.

6.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWF and the LWFS.

Table 6-3 Specifications of the optical module at client side of the LWF
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical interface type I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2b Se-64.2a Le-64.2


Line code format NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 25 40 40 60
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 12901 15301 15301 15301 15301565
330 565 565 565
Maximum mean launched power dBm 1 1 +2 +2 +4

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-5


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Unit Specifications

Minimum mean launched power dBm 6 5 1 1 +1


Minimum extinction ratio dB 6 +8.2 +8.2 +8.2 +8.2
Maximum 20 dB spectrum width nm NA NA 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimum side-mode suppression dB NA NA 30 30 30
ratio (SMSR)
Eye pattern mask NA Compliant with G.691
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 12001 12001 12001 12001 12001650
650 650 650 650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 11 14 14 21 21
Receiver overload dBm 1 1 1 8 8
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27 27
Jitter characteristics Compliant with G.783

Table 6-4 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWF/LWFS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 50 100


Line code format NRZ CRZ NRZ CRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 5 5 5 5
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10 +13 +10 +13
Nominal Central frequency THz 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196.
05, 05 00, 00
186.95190. 186.95190.
90 90
Central frequency deviation GHz 5 5 10 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.56 0.3 0.64
Minimum SMSR dB 35 30 35 30
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 800 300 to +500 800 300 to +500

6-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Parameters Unit Specifications

Eye pattern mask Compliant NA Compliant NA


with G.691 with G.691
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 14 16 14 16
Receiver overload dBm 1 0 0 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWF and the LWFS.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at 550C


250C

E2LWF 32.9 W 36.2 W


E2LWFS 41.7 W 45.8 W
E3LWF 27.1 W 29.8 W
E3LWFS 40.0 W 44.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LWF or the LWFS.

Item Specification

E3LWF, E3LWFS E2LWF E2LWFS

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.4 kg 1.6 kg 1.7 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-7


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

6.2 LRF/LRFS
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LRF board and the
LRFS board.

6.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LRF and the LRFS.

Functionality Description

LRF LRFS

Basic function Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical signals.


The LRF and the LRFS can regenerate unidirectional optical signals.
Regenerating rate STM-64
Relative OTU E2LWF E2LWFS
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding. Supports CRZ encoding.
The use of CRZ encoding will increase
system tolerance to OSNR and extend the
transmission distance.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical
function module.
The output DWDM wavelength of
the module is tunable between 192.1
THz and 196.05 THz, totally 80
wavelengths at an interval of 50
GHz.
FEC function Adopts the FEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.
Overhead processing Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.
Alarms and Monitors B1, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
performance events Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
monitoring
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.

6-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.2.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-3 shows the principle block diagram of the LRF and the LRFS.

WDM side WDM side

G.694.1 Regenerating module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-3 Principle block diagram of the LRF and the LRFS

The working principle of the LRF is described as follows.


The LRF accesses only one channel of optical signal. The regenerating module
reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signal. The module outputs the
processed optical signal.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-9


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

6.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-4 shows the front panel of the LRF and the LRFS.

LRF LRFS

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

IN OUT IN OUT

Figure 6-4 Front panel of the LRF and the LRFS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LRF or the LRFS.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LRF or the LRFS.

6-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive DWDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit DWDM signal.

6.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LRF and the LRFS.

Table 6-5 Specifications of the optical module at DWDM side of the LRF or LRFS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 50 100


Line code format NRZ CRZ NRZ CRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 5 5 5 5
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10 +13 +10 +13
Nominal Central frequency THz 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196.
05, 05 00, 00
186.95190. 186.95190.
90 90
Central frequency deviation GHz 5 5 10 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.56 0.3 0.64
Minimum SMSR dB 35 30 35 30
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 800 300 to +500 800 300 to +500
Eye pattern mask Compliant NA Compliant NA
with G.691 with G.691
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 14 16 14 16
Receiver overload dBm 1 0 0 0

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-11


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Unit Specifications

Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LRF and the LRFS.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

LRF 25.0 W 27.5 W


LRFS 33.0 W 36.3 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LRF or the LRFS.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.3 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.3 LBE/LBES
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LBE board and the
LBES board.
The LBE and the LBES are the same in function and principle, but are different in
encoding mode.

6.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LBE and the LBES.

Functionality Description

LBE LBES

Basic function y Accesses one 10GE-LAN optical signal at the client side.
y Converts signal into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding. Supports CRZ encoding.
The use of CRZ encoding will increase
system tolerance to OSNR and extend
the transmission distance.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical
function module.
The output DWDM wavelength of the
module is tunable between 192.1 THz
and 196.05 THz, totally 80
wavelengths at an interval of 50 GHz.
FEC function Adopts Huaweis own AFEC encoding established on ITU-T G.975.
Overhead processing Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.
ESC function Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission.
Alarms and Provides scrambling, CRC, defect indication and 10 GE service performance
performance events monitoring functions.
monitoring Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes ,Pause frame.
Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.
Protection schemes Supports 1:N optical channel protection, inter board 1+1 optical channel
protection.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-13


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

6.3.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-5 shows the principle block diagram of the LBE and the LBES.

Client side WDM side

10GE-LAN Optical transponder module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-5 Principle block diagram of the LBE and the LBES

The LBE and the LBES are the same in working principle.
Below describes the working principle of the LBE as an example.
At the client side:
The optical transponder module of the LBE receives one 10GE-LAN signal. The
module processes and encodes the signal. The optical transmitter of the module
outputs DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
At the DWDM side:
The LBE receives optical signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical
transponder module processes the signals. The module outputs the original
10GE-LAN signal.
The LBE monitors corresponding performance indexes and alarm signals such as
LOS and CRC error. The LBE also provides scrambling, CRC and defect indication.
Moreover, the LBE monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes and Pause frame.

6-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-6 shows the front panel of the LBE and the LBES.

LBE LBES

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

TX OUT TX OUT

RX IN RX IN

Figure 6-6 Front panel of the LBE and the LBES

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LBE or the LBES.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LBE or the LBES.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-15


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive DWDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit DWDM signals.
Tx LC Transmits service signals to the client side.
Rx LC Receives service signals from the client side.

6.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LBE and the LBES.

Table 6-6 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LBE/LBES
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical Interface type 10G Base -LR 10G Base -ER


Optical interface bit rate Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125
Line code format NRZ NRZ
Optical source type SLM SLM
Target distance km 10 40
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 12901330 15301565
Maximum mean launched power dBm 1 +2
Minimum mean launched power dBm 6 4.7
Minimum extinction ratio dB +6 +8.2
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm 11 14
Receiver overload dBm 1 1
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27
Jitter characteristics Compliant with G.783

6-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 6-7 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LBE/LBES
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 50 100


Line code format NRZ CRZ NRZ CRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 5 5 5 5
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10 +13 +10 +13
Nominal Central frequency THz 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196.
05, 05 00, 00
186.95190. 186.95190.
90 90
Central frequency deviation GHz 5 5 10 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.56 0.3 0.64
Minimum SMSR dB 35 30 35 30
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 800 300 to +500 800 300 to +500
Eye pattern mask Compliant NA Compliant NA
with G.691 with G.691
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 14 16 14 16
Receiver overload dBm 1 0 0 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LBE and the LBES.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at 550C


consumption at 250C

LBE 31.6 W 34.8 W


LBES 44.3 W 48.7 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-17


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LBE or the LBES.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.7 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.4 TMX/TMXS
This section describes the functions and specifications of the TMX board and the
TMXS board.
The TMX and the TMXS are the same in function and principle, but are different in
encoding mode.

6.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the TMX and the TMXS.

Functionality Description

TMX TMXS

Basic function y Multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48 signals into an OTU2 signal.


y Converts the signals into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding. Supports CRZ encoding.
The use of CRZ encoding will increase
system tolerance to OSNR and extend
the transmission distance.
FEC function Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in Adopts the AFEC encoding specified
ITU-T G.975.1 in ITU-T G.975.1
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical
function module.
The output DWDM wavelength of the
module is tunable between 192.1 THz
and 196.05THz, totally 80 wavelengths.
Overhead processing Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.

6-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Functionality Description

TMX TMXS

ESC function Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission.
Alarms and Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
performance events Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
monitoring
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides the ALS function.
Protection schemes Supports client side 1+1 protection, inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

6.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-7 shows the principle block diagram of the TMX and the TMXS.

Client side WDM side


STM-16/OC-48
STM-16/OC-48
Optical transponder module G.694.1
STM-16/OC-48
STM-16/OC-48

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-7 Principle block diagram of the TMX and the TMXS

The TMX and the TMXS are the same in working principle.
Below describes the working principle of the TMX as an example.
At the client side:
The TMX accesses four channels of STM-16/OC-48 signals. After mapping,
asynchronous multiplexing, and FEC encoding, the signals are converted by the
optical transponder module into OTU2 signals compliant with G.709. The module

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-19


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

outputs a channel of optical signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 at the DWDM
side.
At the DWDM side:
The TMX accesses a channel of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The
optical transponder module demultiplexes, processes and converts the accessed
signals. The module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48 signals at the client
side.
The board takes measures for jitter suppression. Also, the board monitors the
related performance indexes and alarm signals.

6.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-8 shows the front panel of the TMX and the TMXS.

TMX TMXS

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

IN OUT IN OUT
RX1 RX1
TX1 TX1

RX2 RX2
TX2 TX2

RX3 RX3
TX3 TX3

RX4 RX4
TX4 TX4

Figure 6-8 Front panel of the TMX and the TMXS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TMX or the TMXS.

6-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX or the TMXS.

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive DWDM signal.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit DWDM signal.
Tx1Tx4 LC Transmits service signals to the client side.
Rx1Rx4 LC Receives service signals from the client side.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the TMX and the TMXS.

Table 6-8 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the TMX
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical Interface type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2


Line code format NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 12601360 12601360 12601360 15001580
Maximum mean launched dBm 3 0 +3 +3
power
Minimum mean launched dBm 10 5 2 2
power

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-21


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Unit Specifications

Minimum extinction ratio dB +8.2 +8.2 +8.2 +8.2


Maximum 20 dB spectrum nm 1 1 1 1
width
Minimum SMSR dB NA 30 30 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm NA NA NA 1600
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 18 18 27 28
Receiver overload dBm 3 0 9 9
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27
Jitter characteristics Compliant with G.783

Table 6-9 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the TMX/TMXS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 50 100


Line code format NRZ CRZ NRZ CRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 5 5 5 5
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10 +13 +10 +13
Nominal Central frequency THz 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196.
05, 05 00, 00
186.95190. 186.95190.
90 90
Central frequency deviation GHz 5 5 10 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.56 0.3 0.64
Minimum SMSR dB 35 30 35 30
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 800 300 to +500 800 300 to +500

6-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Parameters Unit Specifications

Eye pattern mask Compliant NA Compliant NA


with G.691 with G.691
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 14 16 14 16
Receiver overload dBm 1 0 0 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the TMX and the TMXS.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

TMX 42.0 W 46.2 W


TMXS 46.4 W 51.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the TMX or the TMXS.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 1.8 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-23


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

6.5 TMR/TMRS
This section describes the functions and specifications of the TMR board and the
TMRS board.

6.5.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the TMR and the TMRS.

Functionality Description

TMR TMRS

Basic function Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical signals.


The TMR and the TMRS can regenerate unidirectional optical signals.
Regenerating rate 10.71Gbit/s
Relative OTU LBE, TMX, LOG, E3LWF LBES, TMXS, LOGS, E3LWFS
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding. Supports CRZ encoding.
The use of CRZ encoding will increase
system tolerance to OSNR and extend
the transmission distance.
FEC function Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in
ITU-T G.975.1. ITU-T G.975.1.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical
function module.
The output DWDM wavelength of the
module is tunable between 192.1 THz
and 196.05 THz, totally 80
wavelengths at 50 GHz interval.
Overhead processing Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.
Alarms and Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
performance events Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
monitoring
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides the ALS function.

6-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.5.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-9 shows the principle block diagram of the TMR and the TMRS.

WDM side WDM side

G.694.1 Regenerating module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-9 Principle block diagram of the TMR and the TMRS

The TMR and the TMRS are the same in working principle.
Below describes the working principle of the TMR as an example.
The TMR accesses only one channel of optical signals. The regenerating module
reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signals. The module outputs the
processed optical signals.

6.5.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-10 shows the front panel of the TMR and the TMRS.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-25


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

TMR TMRS

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

IN OUT IN OUT

Figure 6-10 Front panel of the TMR and the TMRS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TMR or the TMRS.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

6-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMR or the TMRS.

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive DWDM signal.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit DWDM signal.

6.5.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the TMR and the TMRS.

Table 6-10 Optical interface parameter specifications of the TMR/TMRS


Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 50 100


Line code format NRZ CRZ NRZ CRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 5 5 5 5
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10 +13 +10 +13
Nominal Central frequency THz 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196.
05, 05 00, 00
186.95190. 186.95190.
90 90
Central frequency deviation GHz 5 5 10 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.56 0.3 0.64
Minimum SMSR dB 35 30 35 30
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 800 300 to +500 800 300 to +500
Eye pattern mask Compliant NA Compliant NA
with G.691 with G.691
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-27


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650 12001650


Receiver sensitivity dBm 14 16 14 16
Receiver overload dBm 1 0 0 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the TMR and the TMRS.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

TMR 22.3 W 24.5 W


TMRS 35.0 W 38.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the TMR or the TMRS.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.3 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.6 LWC1
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWC1 board.

6.6.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWC1.

Functionality Description

Basic function y Accesses STM-16/OC-48 optical signal compliant with ITU-T G.957 at the
client side.
y Converts the signal into OTU1 optical signal and outputs DWDM standard
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical module.
function The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and
196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval.
FEC function Adopts the FEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975 to enhance the equivalent
sensitivity of SDH transmission system and prolong the span distance effectively.
Overhead processing Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.
ESC function Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission.
Alarms and Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
performance events Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
monitoring
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.
Protection schemes Supports 1:N optical channel protection, inter board 1+1 optical channel
protection.

6.6.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-11 shows the principle block diagram of the LWC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-29


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Client side WDM side

STM-16/OC-48 Optical transponder module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-11 Principle block diagram of the LWC1

Below describes the working principle.


At the client side:
The LWC1 receives, processes and encodes the STM-16/OC-48 signal. The
transmitting optical module inside the LWC1 outputs OTU1 optical signal with the
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
At the DWDM side:
The LWC1 receives and processes the optical signal with the wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1. The LWC1 decodes the signal to restore the original
STM-16/OC-48 signal. The LWC1 sends out the STM-16/OC-48 signal to the
equipment at the client side.
The corresponding performance indexes, such as B1 bit error, can be monitored
during the process.

6.6.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-12 shows the front panel of the LWC1.

6-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

LWC1

RUN

ALM

TX OUT

RX IN

Figure 6-12 Front panel of the LWC1

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWC1.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-31


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive WDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit WDM signals.
Tx LC Transmits service signals to the client side.
Rx LC Receives service signals from the client side.

6.6.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWC1.

Table 6-11 Optical interface parameter specifications at client side of the LWC1
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical Interface type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2


Line code format NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type MLM SLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 40 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 12601360 12601360 12601360 15001580
Maximum mean launched dBm 3 0 +3 +3
power
Minimum mean launched dBm 10 5 2 2
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB +8.2 +8.2 +8.2 +8.2
Maximum 20 dB spectrum nm 1 1 1 1
width
Minimum SMSR dB NA 30 30 30
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm NA NA NA 1600
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650 12001650

6-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Parameters Unit Specifications

Receiver sensitivity dBm 18 18 27 28


Receiver overload dBm 3 0 9 9
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27
Jitter characteristics Compliant with G.783

Table 6-12 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWC1
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 100


Line code format NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10
Central frequency THz 192.10196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 12800
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type APD PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 25 18
Receiver overload dBm 9 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-33


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

LWC1 21.5 W 23.6 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LWC1.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.1 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6-34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.7 TRC1
This section describes the functions and specifications of the TRC1 board.

6.7.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the TRC1.

Functionality Description

Basic function Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical


signals. The TRC1 can regenerate unidirectional optical signals.
Regenerating rate 2.66Gbit/s
Relative OTU LWC1, FDG
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding.
Tunable Supports tunable wavelength optical module.
wavelength The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between
function 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz
interval.
FEC function Adopts FEC function to enhance the equivalent sensitivity of SDH
transmission system and prolong the span distance effectively.
Overhead Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.
processing
Alarms and Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate
performance faults.
events monitoring Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the
monitoring on:
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-35


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

6.7.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-13 shows the principle block diagram of the TRC1.

WDM side WDM side

G.694.1 Regenerating module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-13 Principle block diagram of the TRC1

The working principle of the TRC1 is described as follows.


The TRC1 accesses only one channel of optical signals. The regenerating module
reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signals. The module outputs the
processed optical signals.

6.7.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-14 shows the front panel of the TRC1.

6-36 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

TRC1

RUN

ALM

IN OUT

Figure 6-14 Front panel of the TRC1

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TRC1.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TRC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-37


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive WDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit WDM signals.

6.7.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the TRC1.

Table 6-13 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the TRC1
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 100


Line code format NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10
Central frequency THz 192.10196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 12800
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type APD PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 25 18
Receiver overload dBm 9 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27

6-38 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the TRC1.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at 550C


consumption at 250C

TRC1 21.5 W 23.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the TRC1.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.8 LWM
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWM board.

6.8.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWM.

Function Description

Basic function y Accesses the optical signal at three rates: STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12 or
STM-16/OC-48.
y Converts the signal to DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical module.
function The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and
196.0 THz, support 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval.
Alarms and Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults.
performance events Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
monitoring

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-39


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Function Description
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.
Protection schemes Supports inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

6.8.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-15 shows the principle block diagram of the LWM.

Client side WDM side

STM-1/OC-3
STM-4/OC-12 Optical transponder module G.694.1
STM-16/OC-48

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-15 Principle block diagram of the LWM

The working principle of the LWM is described as follows.


At the client side:
The LWM accesses optical signals at a rate of STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12 or
STM-16/OC-48. The optical transponder module processes and converts these
signals. The module outputs optical signals with the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant
standard wavelengths to the DWDM side.
At the DWDM side:
The LWM accesses optical signals with the standard wavelengths compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1. The optical transponder module processes and converts these
signals. The module outputs optical signals at the rate of STM-1/OC-3,
STM-4/OC-12 or STM-16/OC-48.

6-40 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

The optical transponder module also monitors the B1 bytes. Jitter suppression
measures are taken during signal process.

6.8.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-16 shows the front panel of the LWM.

LWM

RUN

ALM

RX
TX

IN OUT

Figure 6-16 Front panel of the LWM

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWM.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-41


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWM with a pair of input
and output optical interfaces.

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive WDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit WDM signals.
Tx LC Transmits service signals to the client side.
Rx LC Receives service signals from the client side.

6.8.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWM.

Table 6-14 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LWM
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical interface rate STM-1/4/16, STM-1/4/16, STM-1/4/16,


OC-3/12/48 OC-3/12/48 OC-3/12/48
Line code format NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type MLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 12601360 12601360 15001580
Maximum mean launched dBm 3 0 +3
power
Minimum mean launched dBm 10 5 2
power
Minimum extinction ratio dB +8.2 +8.2 +8.2
Maximum 20 dB spectrum nm 1 1 1
width
Minimum side-mode dB NA 30 30
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm NA NA 1600

6-42 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Parameters Unit Specifications

Eye pattern mask Compliant with Compliant with Compliant with


G.957 G.957 G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN APD
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 18 18 28
Receiver overload dBm 3 0 9
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27
Jitter characteristics Compliant with G.783

Table 6-15 Optical interface parameter specifications at DWDM side of the LWM
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 100


Line code format NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10
Central frequency THz 192.10196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 12800
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type APD PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 25 18
Receiver overload dBm 9 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-43


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWM.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

LWM 27.0 W 29.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWM.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.1 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.9 LWMR
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWMR board.

6.9.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWMR.

Functionality Description

Basic function Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical


signals.
The LWMR can regenerate bi-directional optical signals.
Regenerating rate STM-16, STM-4, STM-1
Relative OTU LWM
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding.
Tunable Supports tunable wavelength optical module.
wavelength The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between
function 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz
interval.

6-44 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Functionality Description

Alarms and Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults.


performance Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the
events monitoring monitoring on:
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.

6.9.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-17 shows the principle block diagram of the LWMR.

WDM side WDM side

G.694.1 Regenerating module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-17 Principle block diagram of the LWMR

The LWMR accesses a channel of optical signals at each transmission direction.


The regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signals. It
outputs the processed signals.
The reverse process is similar.

6.9.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-18 shows the front panel of the LWMR.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-45


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

LWMR

RUN

ALM

OUT1OUT2

IN1 IN2

Figure 6-18 Front panel of the LWMR

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWMR.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

6-46 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWMR.

Interface Connector type Description

IN1/IN2 LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive WDM signals.
OUT1/OUT2 LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit WDM signals.

6.9.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWMR.

Table 6-16 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module at DWDM side of the LWMR
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 100


Line code format NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10
Central frequency THz 191.30196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum 20 dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 12800
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type APD PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 25 18
Receiver overload dBm 9 0

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-47


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Unit Specifications

Maximum reflectance dB 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWMR.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption


250C at 550C

LWMR 25.0 W 27.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWMR.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.10 LWX
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWX board.

6.10.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWX.

Functionality Description

Basic function y Accesses the arbitrary rate optical signal (34 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s) at 770 nm1565
nm
y Converts the signal to DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
y Accesses non-common services, such as PDH (34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s
optical interface), enterprise system connection (ESCON) (200 Mbit/s), fibre
channel (FC) (1.06 Gbit/s, 2.12 Gbit/s).

6-48 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Functionality Description

Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding.


Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical module.
function The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and
196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval.
Alarms and Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults.
performance events Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
monitoring
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.
Protection schemes Supports inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

6.10.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-19 shows the principle block diagram of the LWX.

Client side WDM side

34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s Optical transponder module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-19 Principle block diagram of the LWX

The working principle of the LWX is described as follows.


At the client side:

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-49


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

The LWX receives the optical signals at an arbitrary rate (34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
The optical transponder module processes the signal. The module outputs optical
signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 at the DWDM side.
At the DWDM side:
The LWX receives DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical
transponder module processes the signals. The module outputs arbitrary rate optical
signals (at 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s) at the client side.
The optical transponder module of the LWX has jitter suppression function. This
guarantees good jitter suppression performance.

6.10.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the LWX.

LWX

RUN

ALM

RX
TX

IN OUT

Figure 6-20 Front panel of the LWX

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWX.

6-50 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX with a pair of input
and output optical interfaces.

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive WDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit WDM signals.
Tx LC Transmits service signals to the client side.
Rx LC Receives service signals from the client side.

6.10.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWX.

Table 6-17 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LWX
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical interface rate 34M2.7G 34M2.7G 34M2.7G


Line code format NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type MLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 2 15 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating wavelength range nm 12601360 12601360 15001580
Maximum mean launched dBm 3 0 +3
power
Minimum mean launched dBm 10 5 2
power

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-51


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Unit Specifications

Minimum extinction ratio dB +8.2 +8.2 +8.2


Maximum 20 dB spectrum nm 1 1 1
width
Minimum side-mode dB NA 30 30
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm NA NA 1600
Eye pattern mask Compliant with Compliant with Compliant with
G.957 G.957 G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type PIN PIN APD
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 18 18 28
Receiver overload dBm 3 0 9
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27

Table 6-18 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWX
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 100


Line code format NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10
Central frequency THz 192.10196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 12800
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type APD PIN

6-52 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650


Receiver sensitivity dBm 25 18
Receiver overload dBm 9 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWX.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

LWX 27.0 W 29.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LWX.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-53


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

6.11 LWXR
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWXR board.

6.11.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWXR.

Function Description

Basic function Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical


signals.
The LWMR can regenerate bi-directional optical signals.
Regenerating rate 34 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s
Relative OTU LWX
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding.
Tunable Supports tunable wavelength optical module.
wavelength The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between
function 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz
interval.
Alarms and Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults.
performance Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the
events monitoring monitoring on:
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.

6.11.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-21 shows the principle block diagram of the LWXR.

6-54 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

WDM side WDM side

G.694.1 Regenerating module G.694.1

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-21 Principle block diagram of the LWXR

The working principle of the LWXR is described as follows.


The LWXR accesses one channel of optical signals in each transmission direction.
The regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signals. It
outputs the processed signals.
The reverse process is similar.

6.11.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-22 shows the front panel of the LWXR.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-55


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

LWXR

RUN

ALM

OUT1 OUT2

IN1 IN2

Figure 6-22 Front panel of the LWXR

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWXR.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

6-56 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXR.

Interface Connector type Description

IN1/IN2 LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or


the OADM board to receive WDM signals.
OUT1/OUT2 LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit WDM signals.

6.11.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWXR.

Table 6-19 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module at DWDM side of the LWXR
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 100


Line code format NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10
Central frequency THz 192.10196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 12800
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type APD PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 25 18
Receiver overload dBm 9 0

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-57


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Unit Specifications

Maximum reflectance dB 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWXR.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

LWXR 25.0 W 27.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LWXR.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6-58 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.12 LDG/FDG
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LDG board and the
FDG board.

6.12.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LDG. and FDG

Functionality Description

Basic function y The LDG board multiplexes two GE service signals into an STM-16 signal.
y The FDG board multiplexes two GE service signals into an OTU1 signal.
y Converts the signals into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
In addition, the FDG board supports FEC correction.
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical module.
function The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and
196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval.
ESC function Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission.
Overhead processing Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.
Alarms and Provides GE service performance monitoring functions.
performance events Monitors B1, B2 bytes at WDM side to help locating faults.
monitoring
Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.
Protection schemes The LDG and the FDG offer inter-board 1+1 protection, client-side protection.

6.12.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-23 shows the principle block diagram of the LDG.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-59


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Client side WDM side

GE
Optical transponder module G.694.1
GE

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-23 Principle block diagram of the LDG

Below describes the working principle.


At the client side:
The LDG or FDG receives two GE signals compliant with IEEE 802.3z.
These signals are multiplexed into one standard STM-16/OC-48 signal with frame
structure. (For the FDG board, the frame structure is FEC encoded OTU1.) During
this process, B1 and B2 bytes are monitored.
The LDG or FDG converts STM-16/OC-48 signals into standard wavelength
signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
The LDG or FDG outputs the signals to the WDM side for transmission.
At the DWDM side:
The LDG or FDG receives signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
The LDG extracts frames from the STM-16/OC-48 signal, and the FDG extracts
frames from the received OTU1 frame. Meanwhile, the LDG or FDG monitors
performance at the WDM side.
The optical transponder module recovers the GE signals from the STM-16/OTU1
frames.
After jitter suppression, the module outputs two IEEE 802.3z GE channels to GE
router or other GE devices.

6.12.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-24 shows the front panel of the LDG and the FDG.

6-60 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

LDG FDG

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

RX1 RX1
TX1 TX1

RX2 RX2
TX2 TX2

IN OUT IN OUT

Figure 6-24 Front panel of the LDG and the FDG

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LDG. and the FDG

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDG with a pair of input
and output optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-61


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive WDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit WDM signals.
Tx1/Tx2 LC Connected with GE client-side equipment to transmit
IEEE 802.3z standard signals.
Rx1/Rx2 LC Connected with GE client-side equipment to receive
IEEE 802.3z standard signals.

6.12.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following tables give the details about the optical specifications of the LDG.
and the FDG.

Table 6-20 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LDG/FDG
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical Interface type 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-SX


Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Laser operating wavelength nm 12701355 770860
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3.0 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 11.5 9.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB +9 +9
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
operating wavelength range nm 12701355 770860
Receiver sensitivity dBm 19 17
Receiver overload dBm 3 0
Maximum reflectance dB 12 12

6-62 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 6-21 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LDG/FDG
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 100


Line code format NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 10
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10
Central frequency THz 192.10196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 12800
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.957
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type APD PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 25 18
Receiver overload dBm 9 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LDG and the FDG.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

LDG 29.5 W 33.0 W


FDG 34.5 W 38.0 W
Note: The environment temperature range for the tunable wavelength FDG and LDG is -5 to +45

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LDG.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-63


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.13 LOG/LOGS
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LOG board and the
LOGS board.
The LOG and the LOGS are the same in function and principle, but are different in
encoding mode.

6.13.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LOG and the LOGS.

Functionality Description

LOG LOGS

Basic function y Multiplexes up to eight GE/FC100 service signals or four FC200 service signals
into an OTU2 signal.
y Converts the signals into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
The LOG board supports the internal cross-connection of eight client-side
services. The services can be configured to different channels and optical
interfaces so as to enable the flexible cross-connection and grooming of services.
Encoding mode Supports NRZ encoding. Supports CRZ encoding.
FEC function Adopts AFEC encoding, increasing system tolerance to abominable environment.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical
function module.
The output DWDM wavelength of the
module is tunable between 192.1 THz
and 196.05 THz, totally 80
wavelengths.
ESC function Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission.

6-64 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Functionality Description

LOG LOGS

Overhead processing Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.


Alarms and Provides GE or FC100 or FC200 service performance monitoring functions.
performance events Monitors SM_BIP8 byte at WDM side to help locating faults.
monitoring
Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:
y Laser bias current
y Laser cooling current
y Laser working temperature
y Optical power
ALS function Provides ALS function.
Protection schemes Supports 1+1 OTU inter-board optical channel protection, client-side protection.

6.13.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-25 shows the principle block diagram of the LOG and the LOGS.

Client side WDM side

GE or FC100/FC200
GE or FC100/FC200 Optical transponder module G.694.1

GE or FC100

Performance and
alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC board

Figure 6-25 Principle block diagram of the LOG and the LOGS

The LOG and the LOGS are the same in working principle.
Below describes the working principle of the LOG as an example.
At the client side:
The LOG accesses eight channels of GE/FC100 signals or four channels of FC200
signals. The LOG can access the services at three different rates at the same time.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-65


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

The optical transponder module multiplexes, processes and converts the accessed
signals. The module outputs a channel of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1 at the DWDM side.
At the DWDM side:
The LOG accesses a channel of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The
optical transponder module demultiplexes, processes and converts the accessed
signals. The module outputs several channels of low-rate data signals at the client
side.

6.13.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-26 shows the front panel of the LOG and the LOGS.

LOG LOGS

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

RX1 RX1
TX1 IN OUT TX1 IN OUT
RX2 RX2
TX2 TX2

RX3 RX3
TX3 TX3
RX4 RX4
TX4 TX4
RX5 RX5
TX5 TX5
RX6 RX6
TX6 TX6
RX7 RX7
TX7 TX7
RX8 RX8
TX8 TX8

Figure 6-26 Front panel of the LOG and the LOGS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LOG or the LOGS.

6-66 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOG or the LOGS.

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the


OADM board to receive DWDM signals.
OUT LC Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM board to transmit DWDM signals.
Tx1Tx8 LC Transmits service signals to the client side.
Rx1Rx8 LC Receives service signals from the client side.

6.13.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LOG and LOGS.

Table 6-22 Optical interface parameter at the client side of the LOG and LOGS
Item Unit Parameter

Optical interface rate Gbit/s GE(1.25 Gbit/s) /FC100 (1.062 FC200 (2.125
Gbit/s) Gbit/s)
Transmitter parameters at point S
Laser operating wavelength nm 12701355 770860 770860
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3.0 0 2.5
Minimum mean launched power dBm 11.5 9.5 9.5
Minimum extinction ratio dB +9 +9 +9
Receiver parameters at point R
Operating wavelength range nm 12701650 770860 770860
Receiver sensitivity dBm 19 17 17

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-67


OptiX BWS 1600G
6 Optical Transponder Unit Hardware Description

Item Unit Parameter

Receiver overload dBm 3 0 0


Maximum reflectance dB 12 12 12

Table 6-23 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LOG/LOGS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 50 100


Line code format NRZ CRZ NRZ CRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0 0 0 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm 5 5 5 5
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10 +13 +10 +13
Nominal Central frequency THz 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196. 192.10196.
05, 05 00, 00
186.95190. 186.95190.
90 90
Central frequency deviation GHz 5 5 10 10
Maximum 20dB spectral width nm 0.3 0.56 0.3 0.64
Minimum SMSR dB 35 30 35 30
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 800 300 to +500 800 300 to +500
Eye pattern mask Compliant NA Compliant NA
with G.691 with G.691
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 12001650 12001650 12001650 12001650
Receiver sensitivity dBm 14 16 14 16
Receiver overload dBm 1 0 0 0
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LOG and LOGS.

6-68 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 6 Optical Transponder Unit

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

LOG 43.2 W 47.5 W


LOGS 51.8 W 57.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LOG and LOGS.

Item Specification

LOG LOGS

Weight 1.5 kg 1.8 kg


Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)
Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU9IU12

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-69


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,


Add and Drop Unit

This chapter describes the optical multiplexer, demultiplexer and add/drop units of
the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms of:
Functionality
Working principle
Front panel
Technical specifications

Note
The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify
the positions and silkscreens of the optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-1


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

7.1 M40 and V40


This section describes the functions and technical specifications of an M40 board
and a V40 board.
According to the working wavelength, the M40 is available in four types:
C-ODD
C-EVEN
L-ODD
L-EVEN
The V40 is available in two types:
C-ODD
C-EVEN

7.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the M40 and the V40.

Functionality Description

M40 V40

Basic function Multiplex 40 channels Multiplexes 40 channels with


compliant with ITU-T the channel space of 100 GHz
Recommendation G.694.1 with into the main path.
the channel spacing of 100 Adjusts the output optical
GHz into one main path. power of each wavelength
signal.
Online optical Provides an online monitoring port "MON".
performance Hence, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked
monitoring online through the MCA board or an optical spectrum analyser.
Alarms and Supports optical power detecting as well as alarm and
performance events performance event reporting.
monitoring

7.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-1 shows the principle block diagram of the M40 and the V40.

7-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

40 optical inputs
OUT
MUX Splitter MON

Control and
SCC
communication circuit

Figure 7-1 Principle block diagram of the M40 and the V40

At the transmit end of an open system:


The M40 multiplexes the optical signals from 40 OTUs at the transmit end into one
optical fibre for transmission.
At the transmit end of an integrated system:
The M40 directly multiplexes the line optical signals from 40 customer equipment
into the main path. The M40 sends the signals to the ITL for C or L band odd/even
multiplexing and outputs the signals to the optical amplifier.
In terms of functional modules, the M40 comprises optical modules and electrical
modules.
The optical module consists of an optical multiplexer for multiplexing and an
optical splitter for output of 40 wavelengths.
The electrical module refers to a control and communication circuit. This
circuit controls the temperature of the multiplexer, checks the total power of
output signals and communicates with the SCC.
The V40 works in a similar way as the M40. But the V40 is added with a
40-channel variable optical attenuator.

7.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-2 shows the front panel of the M40 and the V40.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-3


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

M40 V40

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

196.00 196.00
MONOUT M01M02 M03 M04 M05M06 MONOUT M01M02 M03 M04 M05M06

M07M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13M14 M07M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13M14

M15M16 M17M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M15 M16 M17M18 M19 M20 M21 M22

M23 M24 M25M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M23 M24 M25M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

M31 M32 M33M34 M35 M36 M31 M32 M33M34 M35 M36

M37 M38 M39 M40 M37 M38 M39 M40

192.10 192.10

Note: The values 196.00 and 192.10 indicate the frequencies of the first and the last wavelengths that can be
multiplexed by this board.
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the M40 and the V40

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the M40 or the V40.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

7-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40 or the V40.

Interface Connector type Description

M01M40 LC Receives the signals to be multiplexed.


OUT LC Transmits multiplexed signals. Connect ITL for
odd/even multiplexing; otherwise, connect OAU.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

7.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the M40 and the V40.

Parameters Unit Specifications (40-channel)

Channel spacing GHz 100


Insertion loss dB <8 /10 (Note 1)
Reflectance dB <40
Operating wavelength range nm 15291561/15701604 (Note 2)
Isolation (adjacent channels) dB >22
Isolation (non-adjacent dB >25
channels)
Polarization dependent loss dB <0.5
(PDL)
Temperature characteristics pm/C <2

Maximum channel insertion dB <3


loss difference
Note1: 10 is for V40. Before delivery, the VOA value of each channel in V40 is set to 3dB. Thus, the value of
insertion loss may be 13 dB in testing. The VOA value can be adjusted according to the actual requirement.
Note2: The wavelength range of the C-band multiplexer is 1529 nm 1561 nm. The wavelength range of the
L-band multiplexer is 1570 nm 1604 nm. The center wavelength is compliant with ITU-T G.694.1
Recommendation.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the M40 and the V40.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-5


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

M40 20.0 W 22.0 W


V40 46.0 W 50.6 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the M40 or the V40.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 2.2 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU2IU6, IU9IU13

7.2 D40
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the D40 board.
According to the working wavelengths, the D40 is available in four types:
C-ODD
C-EVEN
L-ODD
L-EVEN

7.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the D40.

Functionality Description

Basic function Demultiplexes main path signal to 40 channels compliant


with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1 of service with the
channel space of 100 GHz.
Online optical Provides an online monitoring port "MON" to monitor the
performance monitoring optical spectrum of the main path online through the MCA
board or an optical spectrum analyser.
Alarms and performance Supports optical power detecting as well as support alarm
events monitoring and performance event reporting.

7-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

7.2.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-3 shows the principle block diagram of the D40.
MON

40 optical outputs
Splitter DMUX
Input

Control and
SCC
communication circuit

Figure 7-3 Principle block diagram of the D40

At the receive end of an open system:


The D40 demultiplexes the optical signal from the main path into 40 optical signals
of different wavelengths. The signal is transmitted on a single optical fibre..
At the receive end of an integrated system:
The D40 directly receives the line optical signal from the main path.
The D40 demultiplexes the signal to 40 client-side equipment.
In terms of functional modules, the D40 comprises optical modules and electrical
modules.
The optical module consists of an optical demultiplexer and an optical
splitter.
The electrical module refers to a control and communication circuit. This
circuit controls the temperature of the demultiplexer, checks the total power
of input signal and communicates with the SCC.

7.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-4 shows the front panel of the D40.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-7


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

D40

RUN

ALM
196.00

MON IN D01D02 D03 D04 D05D06

D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22

D23D24 D25D26 D27D28 D29 D30

D31 D32 D33D34 D35D36

D37D38 D39 D40


192.10

Note: The values 196.00 and 192.10 indicate the frequencies of the first and the last wavelengths that can be
multiplexed by this board.
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the D40

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the D40.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

7-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the D40.

Interface Connector type Description

D01D40 LC Transmits demultiplexed signals to OTUs.


IN LC Receives the signals to be demultiplexed.
Connects ITL for odd/even demultiplexing;
otherwise, connects the OAU directly.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

7.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the D40.

Parameters Unit Specifications (40-channel)

Channel spacing GHz 100GHz


Insertion loss dB <8
Reflectance dB <40
Isolation (adjacent channels) dB >25
Isolation (non-adjacent channels) dB >25
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB <0.5
Temperature characteristics pm/C <2

Maximum channel insertion loss dB <3


difference
1dB spectral width nm >0.2
20dB spectral width nm <1.4

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the D40.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

D40 20.0 W 22.0 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-9


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the D40.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 1.6 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU2IU6, IU9IU13

7.3 MR2
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the MR2
board.

7.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the MR2.

Functionality Description

Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplex two channels of signals from the
multiplexed signals.
Can be used for C-band and L-band.
Concatenate function Provides the optical interface to concatenate other MR2s.

7.3.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-5 shows the principle block diagram of the MR2.

7-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

A01 A02

OUT MI
OADM optical
module MO
IN

Communication
SCC
module

D01 D02

Figure 7-5 Principle block diagram of the MR2

The MR2 consists of optical modules and electrical modules.


The optical module includes an add/drop optical module which adds or drops two
channels of signals. The optical module fulfils the add/drop multiplexing of two
wavelength channels. The module also provides intermediate interface for the
interconnection with other OADM boards. Thus, the system can add or drop more
services at the local station.
The electrical module consists of a communication circuit. This circuit reports the
parameter (such as the wavelength to be added or dropped) of the optical module to
the SCC. The module communicates with the SCC, and reports the board
configuration.
"IN" receives multiplexed signals and drops the multiplexed signals through the
drop module.
"OUT" transmits multiplexed signals and adds two client channels through the add
module.
"MI" and "MO" are two extended ports used for cascading other MR2.

7.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-6 shows the front panel of the MR2.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-11


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

MR2

RUN

ALM

A01 A02

D01 D02

OUT MO

IN MI

Figure 7-6 Front panel of the MR2

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the MR2.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

7-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR2.

Interface Connector type Description

IN/OUT LC Receives or transmits the multiplexed signals.


A01/A02 LC Receives the optical signals from the OTU or
integrated client-side equipment, and thus adding one
channel into the multiplexed signal respectively.
D01/D02 LC Transmits optical signals to the OTU or integrated
client-side equipment, and thus dropping one channel
from the multiplexed signal respectively.
MI/MO LC Cascades input or output interfaces; used to
concatenate another MR2, adding or dropping others
channel in the multiplexed signal.

7.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the MR2.

Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing GHz 100GHz


Operating wavelength range nm C band: 15291570
1dB spectral width nm >0.2
Insertion loss of Add/Drop wavelength dB <2.5
channel
Insertion loss of pass-through channel dB <3.0
Isolation of adjacent channels dB >25
Add/Drop channel flatness dB <1
Return loss dB 40
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB <0.2
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) ps 0.15
Maximum input power dBm 24
Working temperature C 5 to +55

Temperature characteristics pm/C <2

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-13


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Unit Specifications

Insertion variation with temperature dB/C <0.006

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the MR2.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

MR2 7.0 W 7.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the MR2.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

7.4 DWC
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the DWC board.

7.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the DWC.

7-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

Functionality Description

Basic function Used with the optical multiplexer, optical demultiplexer to


realise the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
(ROADM) function dynamically.
The function is to adjust the wavelengths added to or dropped
from each node, and to adjust the wavelengths resource
allocation among nodes by adjusting the pass-through or
congestion status of wavelengths.
This operation does not affect the service transmission on the
main optical channel.
Online optical Provides in-service monitoring interfaces.
performance The MCA board or the optical spectrum analyser can monitor the
monitoring performance of the main optical channel.
The monitoring does not affect the services.
Power equalization Adjusts the attenuation of any wavelength independently to
control and equalise the power of each wavelength.
Network Supports the T2000 software remote configuration to re-allocate
management fast wavelength.
function

7.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-7 shows the principle block diagram of the DWC.

DROP MON MO MI ADD

ROADM optical module


IN OUT

CPU

Communication module

SCC board

Figure 7-7 Principle block diagram of the DWC

The multiplexed signal is accessed from the "IN" interface, split into the same two
optical signals. One signal is sent to the WB optical module and the other is sent to
the optical demultiplexer unit through the "DROP" optical interface.
The WB optical module locates inside the ROADM optical module:

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-15


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

Blocks or terminates the wavelengths received by the local node.


Adjusts the power of other wavelengths in the signal.
Outputs some optical signals to the "MON" interface.
Sends other signals to the optical coupler.
The signal to be transmitted from the local node is multiplexed, and is sent to the
optical coupler through "ADD" interface. Then, the signal couples with the
pass-through wavelength sent from WB. Finally, the signal is output from the
"OUT" interface.
"MI" and "MO" are interfaces used for cascading other DWC.

7.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-8 shows the front panel of the DWC.

DWC

RUN
OUT DROP
AL M

IN ADD
MON

MI MO

Figure 7-8 Front panel of the DWC

7-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the DWC.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the DWC.

Interface Connector type Description

ADD LC Connected with the OTU, receive signal added locally


DROP LC Connected with the OTU, drop service signal locally
IN LC Receives multiplexed optical signals.
OUT LC Transmits multiplexed optical signals.
MI/MO LC Cascades input/output interface for another DWC.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

7.4.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the DWC.

Parameters Indices Unit

Channel spacing 100 GHz


Working wavelength range 15291561 nm
Working wavelength number 40
Channel attenuation range 015 dB
Insertion loss IN-DROP 8.0 dB

IN-MO(Note1) 12.0 dB

MI-OUT 2.0 dB

ADD-OUT 8.0 dB

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-17


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

Parameters Indices Unit

Insertion loss uniformity 1.0 dB


0.5 dB bandwidth(Pass > 50 GHz
bandwidth)
Block extinction ratio > 35 dB
PMD < 0.5 ps
PDL < 0.7 dB
Return loss > 40 dB
Maximum input optical power 25 dBm
Module response time < 50 ms
Note1: This is the insertion loss when the build-in VOA is set to 0.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the DWC.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

DWC 16.0 W 17.6 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the DWC.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 0.9 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

7-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

7.5 ITL
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the ITL board.

7.5.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the ITL.

Functionality Description

Basic function Multiplexes or demultiplexes the odd channels and even


channels.
The ITL board comprises two interleavers for multiplexing and
demultiplexing.

7.5.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-9 shows the principle block diagram of the ITL.

ODD TO 50 GHz
100 GHz Interleaver OAU
IN
EVEN TE

ODD RO
50 GHz
100 GHz Interleaver OAU
OUT
EVEN RE

ITL

Figure 7-9 Principle block diagram of the ITL

Using interleaver technology, the ITL separates 80 channels with 50-GHz channel
spacing in C-band or L-band into two streams of 40 channels with 100-GHz
channel spacing at the receive end. The channels are uniformly spaced, and are
separated into ODD and EVEN channels. The channels with 100-GHz channel
spacing are sent to the matched boards for demultiplexing.
At the transmit end, the whole process works reversely.
The ITL consists of electrical module and optical module. The electrical module
report whether the board is in position and the environment temperature..

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-19


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

The optical module consists of two interleavers. The interleaver separates the
50-GHz spaced optical signals input from OAU board into ODD and EVEN
channels with 100-GHz channels spacing.
In the reverse direction, the interleaver multiplexes the 100-GHz spaced ODD and
EVEN channels from the M40 board into one stream with 50-GHz channel spacing.

7.5.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-10 shows the front panel of the ITL.

ITL

RUN

ALM

TE RE

TO RO

IN OUT

Figure 7-10 Front panel of the ITL

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the ITL.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

7-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the ITL.

Interface Connector type Description

TE LC Transmits EVEN channels.


TO LC Transmits ODD channels.
RE LC Receives EVEN channels.
RO LC Receives ODD channels.
IN LC Receive interleavered signals.
OUT LC Transmit interleavered signals.

7.5.4 Parameter Description


The T2000 does not provide the parameters of a WDM interface on the ITL.

7.5.5 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the ITL.

Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm C-band: 15291561


L-band: 15701604
Input channel spacing GHz 100
Output channel spacing GHz 50
Insertion loss dB <3
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB <1
Isolation dB >25
Return loss dB >40
Directivity dB >55
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) ps <0.5
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB <0.5
Input optical power range dBm 24

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-21


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the ITL.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

ITL 30.0 W 33.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the ITL.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 2.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

7.6 FIU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the FIU board.
The FIU board has two specifications: E1FIU and E2FIU. Besides the functions of
the E1FIU, the E2FIU has the function to detect the input optical power and can
perform the self-test of the internal voltage.
The E1FIU and E2FIU have five types classified according to functions
respectively.
FIU- 01: Applicable only in the 1600G system without clock protection.
FIU- 02: Applicable only in the system where clock protection is required (with
1625-nm protection wavelength).
FIU-03: Supports only the multiplexing or demultiplexing of C-band and
supervisory signals (1510 nm). The number of board components is decreased to
save cost. FIU-03 is used in C-band 400G/100G system (type III and V systems)
and C-band 800G system (type II).
FIU-04: Supports only the multiplexing or demultiplexing of L-band and
supervisory signals (1625 nm). The FIU-04 is applicable in the 400G (type-IV)
system of L-band.

7-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

FIU-06: Supports only the multiplexing or demultiplexing of C-band and


supervisory signals (1510 nm). The number of board components is decreased to
save cost. The FIU06 is used on the occasion when the optical power is high. It can
apply to the C-band 400G/100G system(type VI system).

7.6.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the FIU-01, FIU-02, FIU-03, FIU-04
and FIU-06.

Functionality Description

FIU-01/02 FIU-03/06 FIU-04

Basic function Multiplexes or Multiplexes or Multiplexes or


demultiplexes the demultiplexes the demultiplexes the
C-band channel, L-band C-band channel and L-band channel and
channel and supervisory supervisory supervisory
channel. channel. channel.

7.6.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-11 shows the principle block diagram of the FIU-01/FIU-02.
TMB TM

1625nm 1510nm
C-band
TC WDM C/L
L-band WDM IN
TL WDM

LINE
L-band Coupler
RL WDM C/L
C-band WDM OUT
RC WDM

1625nm 1510nm MON

RMB RM

Figure 7-11 Principle block diagram of the FIU-01/FIU-02

In eastward transmission:
1. The C/L WDM component divides the optical signal into C-band supervisory
signal (1510 nm) and L-band supervisory signal (1625 nm).
2. The C-band WDM extracts the optical supervisory channel (1510 nm) from
the C-band signal and the L-band WDM extracts the optical supervisory
channel (1625 nm).

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-23


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

3. C-band and L-band signals are sent to the DWDM equipment through "TC"
and "TL" respectively, and the supervisory channel is sent through "TM" and
"TMB" for further processing.
In westward transmission:
The C/L WDM component multiplexes the L-band+1625 multiplexed signal with
C-band+1510 multiplexed signals and then outputs the signals.
When the optical supervisory channel signal needs no protection, use the FIU-01.
The FIU-01 does not provide the two WDM optical couplers. See the dotted lines in
Figure 7-11.
The FIU-03 is used in C-band system. This board includes two WDM components,
multiplexing or demultiplexing the C-band signal and supervisory signal in the
transmitting and receiving directions respectively. See Figure 7-12.
The working principle of the FIU-06 is the same as that of the FIU-03. But the
FIU-06 is used on the occasion when the optical power is high (Type VI system).
TM

1510 nm

C-band
TC WDM IN

LINE

Coupler
C-band
RC WDM OUT
1510 nm
MON

RM

Figure 7-12 Principle block diagram of the FIU-03/06

The FIU-04 is used in L-band 400G system only. This board includes two WDM
components, multiplexing or demultiplexing the L-band signal and supervisory
signal in the transmitting and receiving directions respectively. See Figure 7-13.

7-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

TMB

1625 nm

L-band
TL WDM IN

LINE

Coupler
L-band
RL WDM OUT
1625 nm
MON

RMB

Figure 7-13 Principle block diagram of the FIU-04

7.6.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the FIU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-25


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

FIU FIU FIU FIU


FIU

RUN RUN RUN RUN


RUN

ALM ALM ALM ALM


ALM

MON MON MON


MON MON

IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT OUT

TC RC TC RC TC RC

TL RL RC

TC IN
TM RM
TL RL TL RL
TMB RMB
TM RM TM RM TM RM

TMB RMB

FIU-01 FIU-02 FIU-03 FIU-04 FIU-06


Figure 7-14 Front panel of the FIU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the FIU.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

7-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

Interfaces
There are nine optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU-01.

Interface Connector type Description

TC/TL LC Transmits C/L band channels.


RC/RL LC Receives C/L band channels.
IN/OUT LC Receives or transmit line signals.
TM/RM LC Transmits or receive the supervisory channel over
1510 nm.
MON LC Connected with the MCA for monitoring
performance.

There are 11 optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU-02.

Interface Connector type Description

TC/TL LC Transmits C/L band channels.


RC/RL LC Receives C/L band channels.
IN/OUT LC Receives or transmit line signal.
TM/RM LC Transmits or receive the supervisory channel over
1510 nm.
TMB/RMB LC Transmits or receive the backup supervisory channel
(optional) over 1625 nm.
MON LC Connected with the MCA for monitoring
performance.

There are 7 optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU-03/ FIU-06.

Interface Connector type Description

TC LC Transmits C band channels.


RC LC Receives C band channels.
IN/OUT LC Receives or transmit line signal.
TM/RM LC Transmits or receive the supervisory channel over
1510 nm.
MON LC Connected with the MCA for monitoring
performance.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-27


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

There are 7 optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU-04.

Interface Connector type Description

TL LC Transmits L band channels.


RL LC Receives L band channels.
IN/OUT LC Receives or transmit line signal.
TMB/RMB LC Transmits or receive the supervisory channel over
1510 nm.
MON LC Connected with the MCA for monitoring
performance.

7.6.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the FIU.

Table 7-1 Parameter specifications of FIU-01 (C+L+1510)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm C-band: 15291561


L-band: 15701604
Supervisory channel in C-band: 15001520
Insertion loss dB INTC: < 1.5

INTL: < 1.5

RCOUT: < 1.5

RLOUT: < 1.5

INTM (@M): <2.0(Note1)

RMOUT(@M): <2.0
Isolation dB IN to TM (@ C): >40(Note1)

IN to TC (@ L): >35(Note1)

IN to TC (@ M): >20

IN to TL (@ C): >40
Return loss dB >40
Directivity dB >55

7-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

Parameters Unit Specifications

Polarization dependent loss dB <0.2


(PDL)
Note1: @M, indicates the measured value of the 1510-nm optical supervisory signals.
@C, indicates the measured value of the Cband optical signals.
@L, indicates the measured value of the Lband optical signals.

Table 7-2 Parameter specifications of FIU-02 (C+L+1510+1625)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm C-band: 15291561


L-band: 15701604
Supervisory channel in C-band: 15001520
Supervisory channel in L-band: 16151635
Insertion loss dB INTC: < 1.5

INTL: < 1.5

RCOUT: < 1.5

RLOUT: < 1.5

INTM (@M): <2.0

INTMB(@MB): <2.0(Note1)

RMOUT(@M): <2.0

RMBOUT(@MB): <2.0
Isolation dB IN to TM (@ C): >40

IN to TMB (@ L): >40

IN to TC(@ L): >35

IN to TC (@ M): >20

IN to TL (@ C): >40

IN to TL (@ MB): >12
Return loss dB >40
Directivity dB >55
Polarization dependent loss dB <0.2
(PDL)
Note1: @ MB, indicates the measured value of the 1625-nm optical supervisory signals.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-29


7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, OptiX BWS 1600G
Add and Drop Unit Hardware Description

Table 7-3 Parameter specifications of FIU-03/06 (C+1510)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm C-band: 15291561


Supervisory channel in C-band: 15001520
Insertion loss dB INTC: 1.0

RCOUT: 1.0

INTM (@M): 1.5

RMOUT(@M): 1.5
Isolation dB IN to TM (@ C): > 40

IN to TC (@ M): > 12
Return loss dB >40
Directivity dB >55
Polarization dependent loss dB <0.2
(PDL)

Table 7-4 Parameter specifications of FIU-04 (L+1625)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm L-band: 15701604


Supervisory channel in L-band: 16151635
Insertion loss dB INTL: < 1.0

RLOUT: < 1.0

INTMB (@MB): < 1.5

RMBOUT(@MB): < 1.5


Isolation dB IN to TMB (@L): > 40

IN to TL (@MB): >1 2
Return loss dB > 40
Directivity dB > 55
Polarization dependent loss dB < 0.2
(PDL)

7-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer,
Hardware Description Add and Drop Unit

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the FIU.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

FIU 4.3 W 4.8 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the FIU.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 0.9 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-31


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

The OptiX BWS 1600G offers two types of optical fibre amplifiers.
One is EDFA (Erbium-doped optical fibre amplifier) which is widely used for
DWDM system. Optical signals can be directly amplified in erbium-doped fibre to
compensate signal attenuation.
The other is Raman optical fibre amplifier (simply called Raman amplifier) used in
long-haul transmission.
Together with EDFA, Raman amplifier can amplify optical signals with low noise,
and suppress degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio. This greatly extends the
transmission distance without any electrical regenerator. In the OptiX BWS 1600G,
Raman amplifier is always used with EDFA.
This chapter describes the optical amplifier units of the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms
of:
Functionality
Working principle
Front panel
Parameter description
Technical specifications

Note
The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify
the positions and silk screens of the optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

8.1 OAU
The OptiX BWS 1600G system has two kinds of OAUs in terms of hardware
version: E2OAU and E3OAU.
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OAU board.
There are one type of the E2OAU: OAU-LG
The OAU-LG is used for amplifying L-band optical signals.
There are three types of the E3OAU, which can be used in the C-band system:
OAUC01
OAUC03
OAUC05
These eight types of boards are the same in fulfilling functions. But the parameters
of these boards are designed differently according to different applications.

8.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OAU.

Functionality Description

Basic function Amplifies 80 channel optical signals of C-band or L-band with


channel spacing of 50 GHz at the same time.
Transmission The transmission distance can reach up to 80 km120 km without
distance regeneration.
Gain adjusting Gain can be adjusted continuously from the minimum to the
maximum.
The gain of the C-band wavelength channels oriented the
E3OAU can be adjusted within 2.5 dB of the gain boundary.
Online optical Provides an online monitoring port MON.
performance Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked
monitoring online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyzer.
Gain lock function Adds or drops one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation
does not affect the signal gain of other channels.
Transient control When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the
function fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the
smooth upgrading and expansion.
Alarms and The OAU:
performance events y Detects and reports the optical power.
monitoring
y Detects and controls pump laser temperature.
y Detects pump driving current, back facet current, cooling
current, and ambient temperature of board.

8-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

8.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 8-1 shows the principle block diagram of the OAU.

OUT
IN EDFA optical module
MON

Control and communication module SCC

Figure 8-1 Principle block diagram of the OAU

(1) C-band OAU


The EDFA optical module amplifies optical signals. The control and
communication module detects and controls the working status of the EDFA optical
module. The latter module also communicates with the SCC board.
The OAU can access the DCM.
The OAU adopts automatic gain control technology. This keeps the gain of each
wavelength within allowed range in various conditions.
In case of any abnormality in the line, the T2000 system and the SCC enable the
automatic power control function. Thus, the total output optical power remains
constant under a certain number of wavelengths.
The OAU allows online spectrum analysis by providing monitoring port MON.
Any external spectrum analyser or the built-in MCA can attach with MON.
(2) L-band OAU
The OptiX BWS 1600G system transmits 80 channels on C-band, and 80 channels
on L-band, that is, 160 channels in total. But the EDFA amplification bandwidth is
about 35 nm, covering a part of low loss window (1550 nm) of quartz single-mode
fibre. To use the L-band sources, the EDFA amplification bandwidth must be
expanded. Hence, the OAU adopts an erbium-doped fibre with high density and
low loss. Such a fiber can compensate the impacts of low efficiency and high loss
of L-band pump conversion.
The L-band OAU and C-band OAU are similar in working principle.

8.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3 shows the front panel of the OAU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

OAU

RUN

ALM

MON

IN OUT TDC RDC

Figure 8-2 Front panel of the E2OAU

8-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OAU

RUN

ALM

MON

IN TDC RDC OUT

Figure 8-3 Front panel of the E3OAU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OAU.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the OAU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-5


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Receives the signal to be amplified.


OUT LC Transmits the amplified signal.
RDC LC Receives signals from the DCM, or connects to the
TDC interface directly by fibre jumper if no DCM is
needed.
TDC LC Transmits signals to the DCM for dispersion
compensation, or connects to the RDC interface
directly by fibre jumper if no DCM is needed.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

8.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The OptiX BWS 1600G system has two kinds of OAUs in terms of hardware
version: E2OAU and E3OAU.
The parameters of these two kinds are detailed in this section respectively.
The E2OAU has one type: OAU-LG. For the specific parameters, see Table 8-1.

Table 8-1 Parameters of OAU-LG for L-band


Item Unit Performance parameter

23 dB 28 dB 33 dB

Working wavelength range nm 1570.421603.57 1570.421603.57 1570.421603.57


Total input power range dBm 32 to 3 32 to 8 32 to 13
Single channel 32 channels dBm 32 to 18 32 to 23 32 to 28
input power
range 40 channels dBm 32 to 19 32 to 24 32 to 29
80 channels dBm 32 to 22 32 to 27 32
Noise figure PA dB < 5.5 < 5.5 < 5.5
(NF)
BA dB <6 <6 <6
Input reflectance dB < 40 < 40 < 40
Output reflectance dB < 40 < 40 < 40
Pump leakage at input end dBm < 30 < 30 < 30
Maximum reflectance tolerable at dB 27 27 27
input end

8-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Item Unit Performance parameter

23 dB 28 dB 33 dB

Maximum reflectance tolerable at dB 27 27 27


output end
Maximum total output power dBm 20 20 20
Gain response time to add/drop ms < 10 < 10 < 10
the channel
Channel gain dB 2126 2631 3136
Gain flatness dB 2 2 2
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/dB 2 2 2
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
(PDL)

The OAUC01, OAUC03 and OAUC05 of E3OAU are used in the:


C 800G system (OptiX BWS 1600G type II)
C 400G system (OptiX BWS 1600G type III)
C 100G system (OptiX BWS 1600G type V, for 2.5 Gbit/s services)
Long hop transmission system (OptiX BWS 1600G type VI)
Table 8-2 shows the specifications of the OAUC01, Table 8-3 shows that of the
OAUC03, and Table 8-4 shows that of the OAUC05.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-7


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

Table 8-2 Parameters of OAUC01 for C band


Item Unit Performance parameter

Application code 20 dB 26 dB 31 dB
Working wavelength range nm 1529.161560.61 1529.161560.61 1529.161560.61
Total input power range dBm 32 to 0 32 to 6 32 to 11
Single 32 channels dBm 32 to 15 32 to 21 32 to 26
channel
input power 40 channels dBm 32 to 16 32 to 22 32 to 27
range 80 channels dBm 32 to 19 32 to 25 32 to 30
Noise figure (NF) dB <9 (Note 1) <7 (Note 1) <6 (Note 1)
Output reflectance dB <40 <40 <40
Input reflectance dB <40 <40 <40
Pump leakage at input end dBm <30 <30 <30
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27
tolerable at input end
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27
tolerable at output end
Maximum total output dBm 20 20 20
power
Gain response time to ms <10 <10 <10
add/drop the channel
Maximum channel gain dB 20 23 23 29 29 31
Gain flatness dB 2 2 2
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/dB 2 2 2
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
(PDL)
Note 1: The value for noise figure is varying with the gain which can be tunable. Only the typical value is given here.
Note 2: As for E3OAUC01 amplifier, the total gain is 33 dB. The internal insertion loss is 2-13 dB, thus the gain varies from 20 to
31.

8-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Table 8-3 Parameters of OAU-C03E for C band


Item Unit Performance parameter

Application code 24 dB 29 dB 36 dB
Working wavelength range nm 1529.161560.61 1529.161560.61 1529.161560.61
Total input power range dBm 32 to 4 32 to 9 32 to 16
Single channel 32 channels dBm 32 to 19 32 to 24 32 to 31
input power
range 40 channels dBm 32 to 20 32 to 25 32
80 channels dBm 32 to 23 32 to 28 32
Noise figure (NF) dB <7 (Note 1) <6 (Note 1) <6 (Note 1)
Output reflectance dB <40 <40 <40
Input reflectance dB <40 <40 <40
Pump leakage at input end dBm <30 <30 <30
Maximum reflectance tolerable dB 27 27 27
at input end
Maximum reflectance tolerable dB 27 27 27
at output end
Maximum total output power dBm 20 20 20
Gain response time to add/drop ms <10 <10 <10
the channel
Maximum channel gain dB 24 28 28 30 30 36
Gain flatness dB 2 2 2
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/dB 2 2 2
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
(PDL)
Note 1: The value for noise figure is varying with the gain which can be tunable. Only the typical value is given here.
Note 2: As for E3OAUC03 amplifier, the total gain is 38 dB. The internal insertion loss is 2-14 dB, thus the gain varies from 24 to
36.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-9


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

Table 8-4 Parameters of OAUC05 for C band


Item Unit Performance parameter

Application code 23 dB 30 dB 34 dB
Working wavelength range nm 1529.161560.61 1529.161560.61 1529.161560.61
Total input power range dBm 32 to 0 32 to 7 32 to 11
Single 32 channels dBm 32 to 15 32 to 22 32 to 26
channel
input power 40 channels dBm 32 to 16 32 to 23 32 to 27
range 80 channels dBm 32 to 19 32 to 26 32 to 30
Noise figure (NF) dB <9 (Note 1) <7 (Note 1) <6 (Note 1)
Output reflectance dB <40 <40 <40
Input reflectance dB <40 <40 <40
Pump leakage at input end dBm <30 <30 <30
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27
tolerable at input end
Maximum reflectance dB 27 27 27
tolerable at output end
Maximum total output dBm 23 23 23
power
Gain response time to ms <10 <10 <10
add/drop the channel
Maximum channel gain dB 23 26 26 33 33 34
Gain flatness dB 2 2 2
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/dB 2 2 2
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.5 0.5 0.5
(PDL)
Note 1: The value for noise figure is varying with the gain which can be tunable. Only the typical value is given here.
Note 2: As for E3OAUC05 amplifier, the total gain is 36 dB. The internal insertion loss is 2-13 dB, thus the gain varies from 23 to
34.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OAU.

8-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

E2OAU 42.0 W 70.0 W


E3OAU 30.0 W 50.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OAU.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 2.4 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

8.2 OBU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OBU board.
The OBU has also two hardware versions: E2OBU and E3OBU.
One type of the E2OBU is available: The OBU-L is used for amplifying L-band
optical signals.
The E3OBU is of two specifications, mainly applying to C-band system:
OBUC03 and OBUC05.

8.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OBU.

Functionality Description

Basic function Amplifies 80 channel optical signals with channel spacing of 50


GHz at the same time.
Enables the optical amplification of C-band and L-band.
Transmission The transmission distance can reach up to 80 km120 km
distance without regeneration.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-11


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

Functionality Description

Online optical Provides an online monitoring port MON.


performance Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked
monitoring online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyzer.
Gain lock function Adds or drops one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation
does not affect the signal gain of other channels.
The output power variation of each channel of the optical
amplifiers is less than 2 dB when the input signals of EDFA
reduce from 80 channels to one channel.
Transient control When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the
function fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the
smooth upgrading and expansion.
Alarms and The OBU can:
performance events y Detect and report optical power.
monitoring
y Detect and control pump laser temperature.
y Detect pump driving current, back facet current, cooling
current and ambient temperature of board.

8.2.2 Working Principle


The working principle of the OBU is the same as that of the OAU. See section 8.1
OAU.

8.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-3 shows the front panel of the OBU.

8-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OBU

RUN

ALM

MON

IN OUT

Figure 8-4 Front panel of the OBU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OBU.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the OBU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-13


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Receives the signal to be amplified.


OUT LC Transmits the amplified signal.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

8.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
Table 8-5 shows the parameters of E2OBU.

Table 8-5 Parameters of OBU-L for L-band (for E2OBU)


Item Unit Performance parameter

Application OBU03 OBU05


Working wavelength range nm 1570.421603.57 1570.421603.57
Total input power dBm 22 to 3 22 to 0
Single channel 32 channels dBm 22 to 18 NA
input power range
40 channels dBm 22 to 19 22 to 16
80 channels dBm 22 22 to 19
Noise figure (NF) dB <6 <7.5
Input reflectance dB <40 <40
Output reflectance dB <40 <40
Pump leakage at input end dBm <30 <30
Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end dB 27 27
Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end dB 27 27
Maximum total output power dBm 20 23
Gain response time to add/drop the channel ms <10 <10
Channel gain dB 23 23
Channel gain range 21 to 26 21 to 25
Gain flatness dB 2 2
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/dB 2 2
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB 0.5 0.5

8-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Table 8-6 shows the parameters of the E3OBU.

Table 8-6 Parameters of OBUC03 and OBUC05


Item Unit Performance parameter

Application code OBUC03 OBUC05


Operating wavelength range nm 1529.161560.61 1529.161560.61
Total input power dBm 24 to 3 24 to 0
Single channel 32 channels dBm 24 to 18 24 to 15
input power range
40 channels dBm 24 to 19 24 to 16
80 channels dBm 24 24 to 19
Noise figure (NF) dB <6 <7
Input reflectance dB <40 <40
Output reflectance dB <40 <40
Pump leakage at input end dBm <30 <30
Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end dB 27 27
Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end dB 27 27
Maximum total output power dBm 20 23
Gain response time to add/drop the channel ms <10 <10
Channel gain dB 23 23
Channel gain range dB 21 25 21 25
Gain flatness dB 2 2
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/dB 2 2
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB 0.5 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OBU.

Board Maximum power consumption at Maximum power consumption at


250C 550C

E2OBU 35.0 W 50.0 W


E3OBU 23.0 W 30.0 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-15


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OBU.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 2.2 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

8.3 OPU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OPU board.

8.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OPU.

Functionality Description

Basic function Amplifies C-band 80 channel optical signals at the same time.
Online optical Provides an online monitoring port MON.
performance Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked
monitoring online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyser.
Gain lock function Adds or drops one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation
does not affect the signal gain of other channels.
The output power variation of each channel of the optical
amplifiers is less than 2 dB when the input signals of EDFA
reduce from 80 channels to 1 channel.
Transient control When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the
function fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the
smooth upgrading and expansion.
Alarms and The OPU can:
performance events y Detect and report optical power.
monitoring
y Detect and control pump laser temperature.
y Detect pump driving current, back facet current, cooling
current and ambient temperature of board.

8-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

8.3.2 Working Principle


The working principle of the OPU is the same as that of the OAU. See section 8.1
OAU.

8.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-4 shows the front panel of the OPU.

OPU

RUN

ALM

MON

IN OUT

Figure 8-5 Front panel of the OPU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OPU.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-17


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the OPU.

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Receives the signal to be amplified.


OUT LC Transmits the amplified signal.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

8.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the OPU.

Item Unit Performance


parameter

Operating wavelength range nm 1529.161560.61


Total input power dBm 32 to 8
Single channel input 32 channels dBm 32 to 23
power range
40 channels dBm 32 to 24
80 channels dBm 32 to 27
Noise figure (NF) dB <5.5
Input reflectance dB <40
Output reflectance dB <40
Pump leakage at input end dBm <30
Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end dB 27
Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end dB 27
Maximum total output power dBm 15
Gain response time to add/drop the channel ms <10
Channel gain dB 23
Channel gain range dB 2125
Gain flatness dB 2
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/dB 2

8-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Item Unit Performance


parameter

Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OPU.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at 550C


consumption at 250C

OPU 20.0 W 22.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OPU.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 2.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-19


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

8.4 HBA
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the HBA board.
The HBA is applied in the transmit section of an OTM station of the long hop
system (LHP). The purpose is to increase the output optical power of the signal and
amplify the power in the transmit direction.

8.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the HBA.

Functionality Description

Basic function Amplifies the power of C-band optical signal.


Increases the output optical power of the signal.
Typical Gain Provides two types of gain: 29 dB or 35 dB.
y The gain 29 dB corresponds to the 40-channel system (192.1
THz to 196.0 THz, with channel spacing being 100 GHz).
y The gain 35 dB corresponds to the 10-channel system (192.1
THz to 194.0 THz, with channel spacing being 200 GHz).
The maximum output power is 26 dBm.
Online optical Provides an online monitoring port MON.
performance Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked
monitoring online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyser.
Alarms and Checks and reports current gain.
performance events Inputs or outputs optical power, pump laser drive current, pump
monitoring laser operating temperature, and EDFA optical module
temperature.
Information query Queries ambient temperature of board, detailed information and
software information of board
Software upgrade Supports online load and upgrade of FPGA and software.
online Queries FPGA, board software version, board manufacturing
information and the module type.
Power supply The power module of the board adopts dual hot backup to check
backup the working status of the power module and report alarms.

8.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 8-5 shows the principle block diagram of the HBA.

8-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OUT
IN EDFA optical module
MON

Control and communication module SCC

Figure 8-6 Principle block diagram of the HBA

The HBA consists of EDFA optical module and the control and communication
module.
EDFA optical module
The board adopts integrated EDFA module, including EDFA optical module as well
as related control and detection circuits.
The EDFA optical module realises high-power amplification of optical signal on the
basis of good gain flatness.
The integrated EDFA module contains a built-in control system. This system
controls EDFA optical module, checks all parameters, and communicates with the
board through serial port communication circuit.
Control and communication module
The control and communication module is the central system of the board. This
module links other functional units into a system. The module fulfils the control,
monitoring and alarming functions of the board, as well as data communication
between the HBA and the SCC. The module reports the information about alarms
and performance events of the HBA to the SCC, and passes the command from the
SCC to the HBA.

8.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-6 shows the front panel of the HBA.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-21


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

HBA

RUN

ALM
MON

IN

OUT

Figure 8-7 Front panel of the HBA

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the HBA.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the HBA.

8-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Receives the signal to be amplified.


OUT LSH/APC Transmits the amplified signal.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

8.4.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
Item Unit Performance parameter

40-channel 10-channel

Operating wavelength range nm 192.1196.0 THz 192.1194.0


THz
Total input power range dBm 19 to 3 19 to 9
Noise figure (NF) dB <8 <8
Output reflectance dB <45 <45
Output power range dBm 1026 1626
Gain response time to add/drop the ms <10 <10
channel
Channel gain dB 29 35
Gain flatness dB 2.5 2.5
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB <0.5 <0.5
Polarization mode dispersion ps <0.5 <0.5
(PMD)

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the HBA.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at 550C


consumption at 250C

HBA 24.0 W 26.4 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-23


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the HBA.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 2.6 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

8.5 Raman Amplifier


This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the Raman
amplifier board.

8.5.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the Raman amplifier.

Functionality Description

Basic function Generates pump light with multiple channels and high power.
Provides energy for signal optical amplification in transmission.
Realises long-haul, broad-bandwidth, low-noise, and distributed
online signal optical amplification.
Online optical Provides an online monitoring port MON.
performance Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked
monitoring online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyser.
Alarms and Monitors performance indexes, including the:
performance events y Output power of the board
monitoring
y Pump cooling current
y Pump driving current
y Back-facet current
Auxiliary functions Provides such functions:
y Auto-lock pump power.
y Switch on/off pump source.
y Divide signal light.
y Enable pump laser protection.

8-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

8.5.2 Working Principle


Usually, the Raman amplifier is used at the receive end of the DWDM system. This
amplification is based on optical fibre non-linear effect: SRS (stimulated Raman
scattering). In the OptiX BWS 1600G, the Raman amplifier is always used with the
EDFA.
According to the system capacity and volume, the OptiX BWS 1600G provides two
types of Raman amplifiers including the RPC and RPA.
RPC amplifies the C-band service channels.
RPA amplifies all the160 service channels. So the RPA covers both C-band
and L-band.
Here, the RPA is taken as an example to describe the principle of the Raman
amplifier. Figure 8-7 shows the functional block diagram of the RPA.

SYS
LINE Raman pump source module
MON

Control and communication module SCC

Figure 8-8 Functional block diagram of the RPA

Pump light is generated by the laser in the Raman pump source module. The control
and communication module:
Drives the pump laser.
Controls the temperature, on and off status of the laser
Protects the laser in abnormal conditions.
The RPC and the RPA work on the same principle, except that RPC is only used for
amplification of C-band optical signals.
Used with appropriate EDFA, the Raman amplifier reduces the flatness of system
gain to be less than 2 dB. So the noise figure is greatly reduced.

Note
When connecting/removing the fiber to/from the RPA, turn off the pump laser of
the RPA first.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-25


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

8.5.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-8 shows the front panel of the RPA and RPC.

RPA RPC

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

LINE

EXT

LINE

SYS MON

SYS MON

Figure 8-9 Front panel of the RPA and RPC

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the RPA and RPC.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

8-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the RPA.

Interface Connector type Description

LINE LSH/APC Receives the optical signal from the line.


SYS LC Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.
MON LC Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the RPC.

Interface Connector type Description

LINE LSH/APC Receives optical signals from the line.


SYS LC Transmits amplified signals.
MON LC Connected with MCA for online optical performance
monitoring.
EXT LSH/APC As an extended optical interface. (no use)

8.5.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
Item Unit Performance parameter

Pump wavelength range nm 14001500


Board type C band: RPC C+L band: RPA
Maximum pump power dBm 29 30
Channel gain on G.652 fibre (Note 1) dB >10 >10
Channel gain on LEAF fibre (Note 1 & dB >12 >10
Note 2)
Channel gain on TW RS fibre (Note 1 & dB >13 >10
Note 3)
Effective noise figure on G.652 fibre dB 1 1
Effective noise figure on LEAF fibre dB 0 0.5
Effective noise figure on TW RS fibre dB 1.5 0
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB 0.5 0.5

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-27


OptiX BWS 1600G
8 Optical Amplifier Unit Hardware Description

Item Unit Performance parameter

Temperature characteristic nm/C 1 1

Output connector type LSH/APC (Note 4) LSH/APC


Note 1: This gain refers to on-off gain, that is, the power difference between amplifier ON and amplifier OFF.
Note 2: LEAF fibre is a kind of fibre called large effective aperture fibre.
Note 3: TW RS fibre is a kind of fibre called True Wave Reduced Slope fibre, belongs to NZDSF.
Note 4: The LSH/APC connector is also called E2000/APC connector.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the RPA and RPC.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at 550C


consumption at 250C

RPA 90.0 W 99.0 W


RPC 70.0 W 77.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the RPA and RPC

Item Specification

RPA RPC

Weight 4.2 kg 4.2 kg


Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)
Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

8-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

9 Performance Detection and


Adjustment Units

This chapter describes the optical supervisory units of the OptiX BWS 1600G in
terms of:
Functionality
Working principle
Front panel
Technical specifications

Note
The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify
the positions and silkscreen of the optical interfaces.

9.1 MCA
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the MCA board.
The OptiX BWS 1600G provides four types of the MCA:
MCA-4 (C): Applied for C-band, supporting spectral analysis for four channels of
signals.
MCA-4 (L): Applied for L-band, supporting spectral analysis for four channels of
signals.
MCA-8 (C): Applied for C-band, supporting spectral analysis for eight channels of
signals.
MCA-8 (L): Applied for L-band, supporting spectral analysis for eight channels of
signals.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-1


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

9.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the MCA.

Functionality Description

MCA-4 MCA-8

Basic function Supervises the channel.


Analyses the status of the channel.
Generates alarms upon channel loss or new channel added.
Supervises and reports the:
y Optical power
y Central wavelength
y Signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR)
y Number of channels
Optical switch Selects optical channels by using an optical switch.

9.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-1 shows the principle block diagram of the MCA.

Optical Spectrum Driving/


Analysis Module Control
Circuit

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 9-1 Principle block diagram of the MCA

The MCA provides online monitoring on central wavelength, power, OSNR and
other parameters. These parameters are of eight or four channels of optical signals
in different sites. The MCA also reports the result to the SCC. The MCA makes an
easier locating of a fault.
The MCA consists of an optical spectrum analysis (OSA) module and a
driving/control circuit. The OSA module monitors the parameters such as central
wavelength, optical power, OSNR and the number of optical wavelengths. Through
the data interface, these parameters are sent to the CPU.

9-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

The CPU reports the result to the SCC and the SCC further reports the data to the
T2000. So, you can view these parameters on the T2000.
The driving/control circuit drives or controls the optical spectrum analysis module.

9.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the MCA-8.

MCA

RUN

ALM

R01 R02

R03 R04

R05 R06

R07 R08

Figure 9-2 Front panel of the MCA-8

The front panel of the MCA-4 is similar with that of the MCA-8. Only the
interfaces R01~R04 are on the front panel of the MCA-4.

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the MCA.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-3


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA-8.

Interface Connector type Description

R01R08 LC Connected with the MON interfaces of other


boards to receive optical signals for analysis.

9.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the MCA-8.

Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm C-band: 15291561


L-band: 15701604
Detect range for single channel dBm 10 to 30
optical power
Detect accuracy for optical power dBm 1.5
OSNR accuracy dB 1.5 (OSNR detect range: 13 to 19)
2 (OSNR detect range: 19 to 23)
Detect accuracy for central nm 0.1
wavelength
Note: The OSNR detection function of the MCA is supported by the NRZ/CRZ system with a channel
spacing of 100 GHz and the NRZ system with a channel spacing of 50 GHz. It is not supported by the CRZ
system with a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The MCA in the CRZ system with a channel spacing of 50 GHz
only supports the function to detect the power and the center wavelength.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the MCA.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

MCA 7.0 W 7.7 W

9-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the MCA-8.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 1.7 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

9.2 VA4
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the VA4 board.

9.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the VA4.

Functionality Description

Basic function Adjusts the optical power of four channels of optical signals.
Monitors the optical power and the attenuation, and reports
alarms.
Mainly used in OADM equipment. The VA4 is located before
the M40 to adjust the power of the accessed optical signals.
Attenuation range The range of variable attenuation is 2 dB to 20 dB, and the
resolution is 0.5 dB.

9.2.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-3 shows the principle block diagram of the VA4.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-5


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

IN Varible Optical
OUT Attenuator

IN Varible Optical
OUT Attenuator
CPU
IN Varible Optical
OUT Attenuator
IN Varible Optical
OUT Attenuator

Communication module

SCC

Figure 9-3 Principle block diagram of the VA4

The VA4 consists of four variable optical attenuators and a control and
communication module. The module controls the attenuation of the signal, protects
the variable optical attenuator and communicates with the SCC.

9-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

9.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-4 shows the front panel of the VA4.

VA4

RUN

ALM

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

IN3 OUT3

IN4 OUT4

Figure 9-4 Front panel of the VA4

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the VA4.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-7


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA4.

Interface Connector type Description

IN1IN4 LC Receives signals which need power adjustment.


OUT1OU LC Transmits signals after power adjustment.
T4

9.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the VA4.

Parameters Unit Specifications

Attenuation range dB 220


Adjustment accuracy dB 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the VA4.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

VA4 10.0 W 11.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the VA4.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 1.5 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

9-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

9.3 VOA
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the VOA board.

9.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the VOA.

Functionality Description

Basic function y Adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the
control command sent by the SCC.
y Monitors the optical power and the attenuation, and reports
alarms.
Mainly used in OADM and OLA equipment.
Attenuation range The range of variable attenuation is 2 dB20 dB, and the
resolution is 0.5 dB.

9.3.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-5 shows the principle block diagram of the VOA.

IN OUT
Variable optical
attenuator

Control and
communication
module

SCC

Figure 9-5 Principle block diagram of the VOA

The VOA is used to adjust the optical power of a single optical channel.
The VOA consists of a variable optical attenuator and a control and communication
module. The module controls the attenuation of the signal and communicates with
the SCC.

9.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the VOA.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-9


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

VOA

RUN

ALM

IN OUT

Figure 9-6 Front panel of the VOA

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the VOA.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the VOA.

9-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Receives the signals to be adjusted.


OUT LC Transmits adjusted signals.

9.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the VOA.

Item Unit Value

Attenuation range dB 220


Adjustment accuracy dB 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the VOA.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

VOA 6.5 W 7.2 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the VOA.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 0.8 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-11


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

9.4 DGE
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the DGE board.
Equalization of optical power means to approximately equalise the energy of
optical signals of all channels. This improves the transmission performance.
In the ultra-long haul transmission system, numerous optical amplifiers are
concatenated. The gain spectrum of optical amplifier is not very flat. The spectrum
varies with the absolute gain of the optical amplifier. Hence, after optical signals
pass through several optical amplifiers, the flatness of spectrum is seriously
affected. This results in decrease of OSNR, increase of bit errors and limitation of
the transmission performance of the whole system.
To solve these problems, a DGE is used to adjust the spectrum flatness. When the
gain of the optical amplifier changes, the DGE dynamically adjusts and flattens the
spectrum waveform in the operating bandwidth.

9.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the DGE.

Functionality Description

Basic function Adjusts the attenuation spectrum of each channel of optical


signals, and thus equalising the gain dynamically.
Information report Reports the data to the T2000, such as:
and query y Input or output optical power
y Total insertion loss
y Currently-set insertion loss spectrum
y Optical module type
y Operating wavelength range
Queries board working temperature, detailed information of the
board, and board software version.
Software upgrade Supports online loading of FPGA and board software, and online
online upgrade of optical module software.
Power supply Reliable backup of power supply: Adopts hot backup and
backup supports power failure alarm.

9.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-7 shows the principle block diagram of the DGE.

9-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

IN DGE optical module OUT

Check & Control


module

Communication
module

SCC

Figure 9-7 Principle block diagram of the DGE

The DGE is used in optical equaliser station (OEQ). By adjusting the insertion loss
spectrum, the DGE dynamically adjusts the gain flatness caused by concatenation
of optical amplifiers.
The DGE consists of optical modules and electrical modules.
The optical module is the core module of the board and dynamically adjusts
the optical power of each wavelength.
The electrical module consists of the check and control module and the
communication module. The electrical module checks, controls and reports
the parameters of the DGE optical module, and communicates with the SCC.

9.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-8 shows the front panel of the DGE.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-13


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

DGE

RUN

ALM

IN OUT

Figure 9-8 Front panel of the DGE

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the DGE.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the DGE.

9-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Inputs main path optical signal (to be equalized).


OUT LC Outputs main path optical signal (equalized).

9.4.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the DGE.

Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm 15291561


Dynamic attenuation range dB 621
Fixed insertion loss dB <6

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the DGE.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

DGE 20.0 W 22.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the DGE.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 2.4 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU1IU5, IU8IU12

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-15


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

9.5 DSE
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the DSE board.
The DSE has two types: DSE-I and DSE-II.

9.5.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the DSE.

Functionality Description

Basic function The DSE is applied in the optical dispersion equalizer equipment.
The DSE works with different types of DCMs to equalize
dispersion slope.
The DSE is only used for C-band optical signal.
Information report Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information of the
board.

9.5.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-9 shows the principle block diagram of the DSE.
DSE
IN Dispersion slope compensation OUT
interface module
BD1 BA1 BD2 BA2 BD3 BA3

Dispersion compensation module

Figure 9-9 Principle block diagram of the DSE

The DSE-I provides three groups of optical interfaces for dispersion slope
compensation.
The working principle of the DSE-II is the same as that of the DSE-I. The DSE-II
provides five groups of optical interfaces for dispersion slope compensation.

9.5.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-10 shows the front panel of the DSE-I and the DSE-II.

9-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

DSE DSE

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2

BD1 BD2 BD1 BD2


OUT BA3 BA3 BA4

IN BD3 BD3 BD4

OUTBA5

IN BD5

Figure 9-10 Front panel of the DSE-I and the DSE-II

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the DSE.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the DSE.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-17


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC Inputs the main path optical signal.


OUT LC Outputs the main path optical signal.
BA1BA5 LC Connected with the output port of the DCM.
BD1BD5 LC Connected with the input port of the DCM.

9.5.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the DSE.

Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range nm 15291570


Fixed insertion loss dB <3.0

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the DSE.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

DSE 4.3 W 4.8 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the DSE.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 0.9 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

9-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

9.6 GFU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the GFU board.
Through the gain flattening filter (GFF), the GFU equalises optical power by
working with the E2OAU ,raman amplifier and ROP amplifier. This achieves gain
flatness of cascaded optical amplifiers. There are two types of GFU boards,
supporting applications at C-band and L-band respectively.
Figure 9-11 shows the application location of the GFU in the system by working
with E2OAU. The GFU usually connects to the TDC and RDC optical interfaces of
the E2OAU. If the system adopts the DCM, the GFU can be connected in front of
the DCM.

GFU DCM

OLA OAU OLA

OLA

OLA: Optical line amplifier OAU: Optical amplifier unit


GFU: Gain flattening unit DCM: Dispersion compensation module
Figure 9-11 Location of the GFU in the system by working with E2OAU

9.6.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the GFU.

Functionality Description

Basic function Equalises the optical power of cascaded optical amplifiers. Every
46 levels of cascading E2OAU or 2 levels of cascading raman
amplifiers can use one GFU to offer static compensation for the
gain flatness of the system.
Supports the application of two GFFs, and thus optimising gain
flatness of two fibres.
Information query Queries board ambient temperature, detailed board information,
board software version and optical component type.
Software loading Supports on-line loading of board software.
online

9.6.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-12 shows the principle block diagram of the GFU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-19


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

IN1 OUT1
GFF

IN2 OUT2
GFF

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Optical signal Electical signal

Figure 9-12 Principle block diagram of the GFU

The GFU consists of optical modules and circuit modules.


Through the communication module, the GFU reports related hardware
information and alarm events to the SCC.
Optical module
The optical module is namely the GFF, a passive optical component. The GFU
supports the application of two GFFs which are the core of the GFU. The GFF
partially compensates the gain flatness of the cascaded amplifiers.
CPU
The CPU is the central unit of the board. It links other functional units.
It provides board information to the communication module, and runs the
commands of the SCC. The communication module receives these commands.
Communication module
The communication module communicates data between the GFU and the SCC.
The module reports the alarms and performance events of the GFU to the SCC.
The module also passes the commands, which are sent from the SCC, to the GFU.

9.6.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-13 shows the front panel of the GFU.

9-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

GFU

RUN

ALM

IN1 IN2

OUT1OUT2

Figure 9-13 Front panel of the GFU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the GFU.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-21


9 Performance Detection and OptiX BWS 1600G
Adjustment Units Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the GFU.

Interface Connector type Description

IN1 LC Receives optical signal of the first channel.


OUT1 LC Sends optical signal after gain flattening of the first
channel.
IN2 LC Receives optical signal of the second channel.
OUT2 LC Sends optical signal after gain flattening of the
second channel.

9.6.4 Technical Specifications

Optical Specifications
The parameter specifications of the GFU board are listed in Table 9-1, Table 9-2
and Table 9-3.

Table 9-1 Parameter specifications of GFU01 and GFU02 (used with E2OAU)
Parameters Unit Specifications

Working wavelength range nm 15291561


Channel insertion loss dB 1.512
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB 0.5

Table 9-2 Parameter specifications of GFU03 (used with raman amplifier)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Working wavelength range nm 15291561


Channel insertion loss dB 1.05.0
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB 0.5

9-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 9 Performance Detection and
Hardware Description Adjustment Units

Table 9-3 Parameter specifications of GFU04 (used with ROP amplifier)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Working wavelength range nm 15291561


Channel insertion loss dB 0.56.0
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the GFU.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

GFU 4.3 W 4.8 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the GFU.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 0.9 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-23


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring


Units

The OptiX BWS 1600G provides an optical fibre line automatic monitoring system
(OAMS) to alert the aging of fibre, alarm the line fibre fault and locate faults. The
OAMS, built in the OptiX BWS 1600G, is an optional function.
A built-in OAMS consists of the following three boards:
FMU: Fibre measure unit board
MWA: Measure wavelength access board
MWF: Measure wavelength filter board
Figure 10-1 shows the application of each board in the system.
DWDM node DWDM node DWDM node

MWF
MWF

MWA

FMU

Figure 10-1 Application of OAMS in the system (on-line monitoring)

DWDM nodes can be the OTM, OLA, OADM, OEQ or REG. The FMU board
sends out test optical pulse, as well as receives, collects, processes and reports
reflected signal. By this way, the FMU board monitors the running conditions of
the working optical fibre in real time. One FMU can monitor up to four optical
fibres.
The MWA board combines the service signal and test signal to one optical fibre for
transmission.
When the test signal and the service signal are transmitted in the same direction, the
MWF filters out the test signal at the receive end. This eliminates the effects of the
test signal on the system.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

Note
The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams have different sizes with the
actual ones. These schematic diagrams serve to identify the positions and silkscreen
of the optical interfaces.

10.1 FMU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the FMU board.
The FMU is the core board of the embedded OAMS. The FMU monitors the tested
optical fibre and the testing optical fibre, and reports the test result.

10.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the FMU.

Functionality Description

Basic function Sends out test optical pulse.


Receives, collects, processes and reports the reflected signal, and
thus monitoring the running conditions of the working optical
fibre in real time.
One FMU can monitor four optical fibres at the same time.
It selects the optical fibre to be tested through the optical switch.
Monitoring modes Supports two types of monitoring modes: online and standby
optical fibre.
The FMU can be configured with two OTDR modules of
different wavelengths. The OTDR at 1310 nm is used for online
monitoring, while the OTDR at 1550 nm for monitoring standby
fibre.
Testing function Supports auto-test and manual test.
Software upgrade Supports online load and upgrade of FPGA and board software.
online

10-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 10-2 shows the principle block diagram of the FMU.

1:4 optical OTDR


switch module

CPU

Communication module SCC

Figure 10-2 Principle block diagram of the FMU

The FMU consists of four parts:


Optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) module
The OTDR module sends out monitoring optical pulse and receives reflected
optical signal. After processing and analysis, the module reports the data to the
CPU.
1:4 optical switch
The 1:4 optical switch module inputs the monitoring optical signal, which is sent
from the OTDR module, into the designated test optical fibre. This realises the
monitoring upon four connected optical fibres.
CPU module
The CPU module rearranges the commands of the SCC and sends these commands
to the OTDR module and optical switch module to control their operations. Besides,
The CPU compares the data collected by the OTDR with the reference data stored
in the board. If the data exceeds the threshold, an alarm raises.
Communication module
The communication module communicates the data between the FMU and the
SCC.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

10.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 10-3 shows the front panel of the FMU.

FMU

RUN

ALM

TFM1 TFM2

TFM3 TFM4

Figure 10-3 Front panel of the FMU

10-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the FMU.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the FMU.

Interface Connector Description


type

TFM1 LC Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical fibre.


TFM2 LC Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical fibre.
TFM3 LC Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical fibre.
TFM4 LC Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical fibre.

10.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the FMU.

Item Unit Index

Online monitor Standby fibre monitor

Test wavelength nm 131025 155025


OTDR dynamic range dB 39.5 (Note1) 38.5 (Note1)
Event dead zone m 10 (Note2)
Attenuation dead zone m 30 (Note3)
Pulse width 10ns, 30ns, 100ns, 10ns, 30ns, 100ns, 300ns,
300ns, 1s, 3s, 1s, 3s, 10s, 20s
10s, 20s
Pulse output power dBm 20
Distance accuracy m 1m5 x 10-5 x test distance spacing between
the sample points (not including the group index

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-5


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

Item Unit Index

Online monitor Standby fibre monitor


error)
Readout resolution dB 0.001
Reflection measurement dB 2.0
resolution
Linearity dB/dB 0.05
Group index 1.4001.700

Working temperature C 5 to +55


Note1: The loss incurred by online optical switch and the coupler is considered for the FMU. The dynamic
value is 12 dB smaller than the value of the OTDR component. Besides, the OTDR effective
dynamic range in online monitor mode is different from that in standby fibre monitor mode.
Note2: Test conditions: The pulse width of the test signal is 10ns, and the return loss is not more than 35 dB.
Note3: Test conditions: The pulse width of the test signal is 10ns, and the return loss is not more than 35 dB.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the FMU.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

FMU 25.0 W 27.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the FMU.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 114 mm (W)
Weight 2.5 kg
The number of slots occupied 3
Slots to hold the board IU1IU4, IU8IU11

10-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.2 MWA
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the MWA board.
The MWA multiplexes the monitoring wavelength of the OAMS with service
wavelengths. This realises on-line monitoring upon the optical fibre.

10.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the MWA.

Functionality Description

Basic function Multiplexes the OTDR optical fibre monitoring signal and
service signal of the DWDM transmission system.
Accesses optical fibre monitoring wavelength at 1310 nm, so as
to realise on-line monitoring of optical fibres.
Information report Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information of the
board.

10.2.2 Working Principle


The MWA consists of optical modules and circuit modules.
Optical module: Consists of multiple WDM multiplexers that access multiple
channels of OTDR optical fibre monitoring signals in different cases. The
optical module realises on-line monitoring upon optical fibre.
Circuit module: Reports the board information to the SCC.
Because the optical modules of the MWA are passive optical components, there is
no direct relation between an optical module and a circuit module. The principle of
the optical module is introduced below.
Two types of the MWA can be configured in the OptiX BWS 1600G system.
MWA-I: Usually used at the OTM station. The MWA-I carries two WDM
multiplexing components and accesses two channels of OTDR monitoring optical
signals.
MWA-II: Usually used at the OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station. The MWA-II
carries four WDM multiplexing components and accesses four channels of OTDR
monitoring optical signals.
Figure 10-4 shows the principle block diagram of the MWA.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-7


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

RFM1

TS1 WDM LIN1

To FIU To fiber line

RS1 WDM OUT1

RFM2

Monitoring signal Service signal

Figure 10-4 Principle block diagram of the MWA

The MWA-I has six optical interfaces: LIN1/OUT1, TS1/RS1, and RFM1/RFM2
Below describes the working principle.
In the receiving direction of the OTM unit:
The service signal in the optical fibre enters the WDM module through LIN1
optical interface. At the same time, the OTDR monitoring signal from the FMU
enters the WDM module through RFM1 optical interface of the MWA.
The service signal and monitoring signal are multiplexed reversely in the WDM
module. After passing the WDM module, the service signal is output to the FIU
from TS1 optical interface along its original transmission direction. But the
monitoring signal is transmitted in the contrary direction, entering LIN1 optical
interface for monitoring.
In the transmitting direction of the OTM:
The service signal from the output optical interface of the FIU is output to the
WDM module through RS1 optical interface. At the same time, the OTDR
monitoring signal from the FMU board enters the WDM module through RFM2
optical interface.
After being multiplexed, the two signals are output, through OUT1 optical interface,
to the line fibre for monitoring.
The principle of the MWA-II is the same as that of the MWA-I. But the MWA-II
carries two more WDM components used at OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station.
These two more WDMs multiplex four channels of monitoring signals into the
fibre at receive end and transmit end in two directions at the same time.

10-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 10-5 shows the front panel of the MWA-I and the MWA-II.

MWA
MWA

RUN
RUN

ALM
ALM
LIN1OUT1

LIN1 OUT1

TS1 RS1
RFM1RFM2
TS1 RS1
RFM1RFM2

LIN2 OUT2
TS2 RS2

RFM3RFM4

Figure 10-5 Front panel of the MWA-I and the MWA-II

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the MWA.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-9


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWA-I.

Interface Connector Description


type

LIN1 LC Input optical interface of the main path.


OUT1 LC Output optical interface of the main path.
TS1 LC Service wavelength output optical interface, connected
with the input optical interface of the FIU.
RS1 LC Service wavelength input optical interface, connected
with the output optical interface of the FIU.
RFM1 LC Monitoring wavelength access optical interface,
connected with one output optical interface of the FMU.
RFM2 LC Monitoring wavelength access optical interface,
connected with one output optical interface of the FMU.

There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWA-II.

Interface Connector Description


type

LIN1/LIN2 LC Input optical interface of the main path.


OUT1/OUT2 LC Output optical interface of the main path.
TS1/TS2 LC Service wavelength output optical interface, connected
with the input optical interface of the FIU.
RS1/RS2 LC Service wavelength input optical interface, connected
with the output optical interface of the FIU.
RFM1/RFM2/ LC Monitoring wavelength access optical interface,
RFM3/RFM4 connected with one output optical interface of the FMU.

10-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

Note
On the front panel, there are 12 optical interfaces, divided into two groups:
LIN1/OUT1/TS1/RS1/RFM1/RFM2
LIN2/OUT2/TS2/RS2/RFM3/RFM4
Each interface in group 1 matches that in group 2 one to one. The interfaces are
used in two directions of the regenerator.

10.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the MWA.

Item Unit Index

Wavelength range of the transmission nm 15001635


channel
Wavelength range of the reflection channel nm 12801340
Insertion loss of the transmission channel dB 1.2
(including that of the connector)
Insertion loss of the reflection channel dB 1.0
(including that of the connector)
Flatness (whole working wavelength range) dB 0.4
Isolation (transmission channel versus dB 40
reflection channel)
Isolation (reflection channel versus dB 40
transmission channel)
Return loss dB 45
Directivity dB 55
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.1
Polarization mode dispersion ps 0.1
Maximum input power dBm 27
Working temperature C -5 to +55

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the MWA.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-11


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

MWA 2.0 W 2.2 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the MWA.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 0.8 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

10.3 MWF
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the MWF board.
The MWF is used to filter out the monitoring wavelength of the OAMS. This is to
eliminate the effects of the monitoring signal on the DWDM system when the
monitoring signal passes through the optical amplifier.
At the transmit end of the OTM or relay stations such as OLA, the direction of the
monitoring signal is contrary to that of the service signal. So the MWF is not
required for filtering.
At the receive end, the monitoring signal and service signal are transmitted in the
same direction. So, before the multiplexed signals enter the FIU, use the MWF to
filter out the monitoring signal.

10.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the MWF.

Functionality Description

Basic function Filters out the OTDR optical fibre monitoring signal of the OAMS.
Correctly report various information of the board.

10-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.3.2 Working Principle


The MWF consists of optical modules and circuit modules.
Optical module
The optical module consists of one or multiple filtering components. The module
filters out the OTDR optical fibre monitoring signal.
Circuit module
The module reports the board information to the SCC.
Because the optical modules of the MWF are passive optical components, there is
no direct relation between the optical module and the circuit module. The principle
of the optical module is introduced below.
Two types of MWF can be configured in the OptiX BWS 1600G system.
MWF-I: Works in the OTM station. The MWF-I carries one filtering component
and filters out one channel of the OTDR monitoring optical signal.
MWF-II: Works in the OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station. The MWF-II carries
two filtering components and filters out two channels of OTDR monitoring optical
signals at the same time.
Figure 10-6 is the principle block diagram of the MWF-I.

OUT
IN
1
1
Filter

To FIU board Line optical fiber

Monitoring signal Service signal

Figure 10-6 Principle block diagram of the MWF-I

The MWF-I board has two optical interfaces: IN1/OUT1.


The MWF-I is usually used at the receive end of the OTM station. The service
signal transmitted over the line fibre and the OTDR monitoring signal are
multiplexed and input to the filtering component through IN1. After the monitoring
signal is filtered out, the service signal is output from OUT1 and input in the
corresponding input optical interface of the FIU.
The principle of the MWF-II is the same as that of the MWF-I, except that the
MWF-II carries one more filtering component, which is used at the OLA, OEQ,
OADM or REG station. This component filters out the monitoring signals in two
directions at the receive end of the relay station.
Figure 10-7 is the principle block diagram of the MWF-II.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-13


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

OUT IN
Filter
1 1

Line optical fiber


To FIU board

OUT IN
Filter
2 2

Monitoring signal Service signal

Figure 10-7 Principle block diagram of MWF-II

10.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 10-8 shows the front panel of the MWF-I and the MWF-II.

10-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

MWF MWF

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

IN1 OUT1 IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

Figure 10-8 Front panel of the MWF-I and the MWF-II

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-15


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the MWF.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWF-I.

Interface Connector type Description

IN LC The input optical interface of the main path,


receiving the multiplexed signal from the line.
OUT LC The output optical interface of the main path,
outputting the service signal to the input optical
interface of the FIU.

There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWF-II.

Interface Connector type Description

IN1/IN2 LC The input optical interface of the main path,


receiving the multiplexed signal from the line.
OUT1/OU LC The output optical interface of the main path,
T2 outputting the service signal to the input optical
interface of the FIU.

Note
On the front panel, there are four optical interfaces, divided into two groups:
IN1/OUT1 matches with IN2/OUT2 one to one, each used in two directions of a
relay station.

10-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the MWF.

Item Unit Index

Passband wavelength range nm 15001635


Stopband wavelength range nm 12801340
Passband insertion loss dB 1.2
(including that of the
connector)
Flatness (whole working dB 0.4
wavelength range)
Isolation (passband versus dB 40
stopband)
Return loss dB 40
Polarization dependent loss dB 0.1
Polarization mode dispersion ps 0.1
Maximum input power dBm 27
Working temperature C -5 to +55

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the MWF.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

MWF 2.0 W 2.2 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-17


OptiX BWS 1600G
10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the MWF.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 0.8 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

10-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

11 Protection Units

This chapter describes the optical protection unit of the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms
of:
Functionality
Working principle
Front panel
Technical specifications

Note
The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify
the positions and silkscreen of the optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

11.1 OCP
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OCP board.

11.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OCP.

Functionality Description

Basic function The OCP provides 1:N (N8) OTU optical channel protection.
The protection prevents the transmission services over the
channel from being interrupted.
Protection scheme This protection operates in a way called "single-fed and single
receiving". This protection is dual-end switched and needs the
support of automatic protection switching (APS) protocol.
Switching time The whole switching process takes no more than 200 ms.

11.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 11-1 shows the principle block diagram of the OCP.
OUT1 OUT2 OUT8 TP RP IN8 IN2 IN1

RX1 TX1

Client side
Client side

RX2 TX2
Coupler Optical Tx Optical Rx Coupler
module module

RX8 TX8
Optical Optical
switch switch

Control circuit

Communication Control
SCC CPU circuit
module
module

Figure 11-1 Principle block diagram of the OCP

The OCP consists of three parts:


Optical transmitting module
Optical receiving module
Control circuit module

11-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

At the transmit end:


The signal from the client side enters the OCP. Through the coupler, 8-channel
protected signals at the client side are sent to the optical switch.
If there is any abnormality in the working OTU, the optical switch selects one
channel according to signal priority and send it to the protection OTU through the
"TP" and "RP" optical ports.
At the receive end:
Eight channels in the OCP are connected to the client-side equipment. Use the
optical switch to select the protected route corresponding to the transmit end.
Couple the signals coming from the protection channel and the protected signal
with the coupler (in application, two channels of signals cannot be valid at the same
time). Output the signals to the signal channel at the client side.
In the protection process, the function of the OCP is to:
Receive the commands of the SCC.
Drive optical switch according to the command.
Connect to the corresponding channel.
Enable the protection function.

11.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 11-2 shows the front panel of the OCP.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

OCP

RUN

ALM

Rx1 Rx2 Rx3 Rx4 Rx5 Rx6

OUT1OUT2 OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6

Rx7 Rx8 Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4

OUT7OUT8 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Tx5 Tx6 Tx7 Tx8 TP RP

IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8

Figure 11-2 Front panel of the OCP

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OCP.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are 34 optical interfaces on the front panel of the OCP.

11-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

Interface Connector type Description

RX1RX8 LC Connects with the client-side equipment to receive


eight channels of signals.
OUT1OU LC Transmits coupled client-side channels to eight input
T8 ports of the working OTUs.
IN1IN8 LC Connects with OTUs to receive working channel
signals.
TX1TX8 LC Connects with the client-side equipment to transmit
eight working channels to external equipment.
RP LC Connects with the protection OTU to receive
protection signals.
TP LC Connects with the protection OTU to transmit
protection signals.

11.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table gives the details about the optical specifications of the OCP.

Item Unit Value

Range of wavelength nm 1290~1330


1530~1565
Insertion loss (working channel) dB <4
Insertion loss (protection channel) dB <5.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OCP.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

OCP 8.0 W 8.8 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-5


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OCP.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)
Weight 1.7 kg
The number of slots occupied 2
Slots to hold the board IU2-IU6, IU9-IU13

11.2 OLP
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OLP board.

11.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OLP.

Functionality Description

Basic function The OLP01 provides optical line protection. This ensures the
services over the fibre line can be received as usual even when
the line is faulty.
The OLP03 provide the inter-subrack 1+1 path protection for one
working/protection OTU pair.
Protection scheme The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and
single-end switching. When the performance of the working fibre
declines, the system automatically switches the service from the
working path to the protection path.
Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS
protocol is not needed.

11.2.2 Working Principle


Figure 11-3 shows the principle block diagram of the OLP01.

11-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

OTU OTU
MUX DMUX
OTU OTU
Client
Client FIU OLP OLP FIU service
service
OTU OTU
DMUX MUX
OTU OTU

Figure 11-3 Principle block diagram of the OLP

Functionally, an E1OLP01 board falls into two parts: dual-fed module and signal
selection module.
The dual-fed module divides the optical signal into two channels with the equal
power. The module also sends over working and protection optical fibers at the
same time.
Signal selection module receives the optical signal from the working channel and
the protection channel at the same time. The module detects and compares the
optical power of two channels, and selects the optical signal of one channel to
output.
For the functions and working principle of the inter-subrack 1+1 protection
provided by the OLP03, refer to OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical
Transmission System Technical Description.

11.2.3 Switching Type


The OLP has five switching types:
Locked switching:
This function is to lock the services on the active path, no matter the active or
standby path is good or not.
Forced switching:
This function is to force the services to work either on the active or standby path, no
matter the active or standby path is good or not.
Fibre broken switching:
If the active path is faulty while the standby channel is normal, the services are
switched from active path to the standby path. If both paths are faulty, the services
are not switched. If the services are transmitted on the standby path, the switching
status is the same.
The working mode can be set to revertive or non-revertive. In revertive mode, if the
active path is recovered and confirmed to be normal for a certain period, the
services are switched back to the active path. In non-revertive mode, even if the
active path is recovered, the services remain on the standby path until a fault occurs
to the standby path.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-7


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

Manual switching
You can also shift the service to any path. That is, you can use either the active or
standby path as a service carrier. Manual switch is only effective when both active
and standby paths are normal.
Clear switching
This function clears the switching state of the above switches.
The table below lists the priorities of the switching types:

Switching type Priority

Clear switching Highest


Locked switching Second
Forced switching Third
Fibre broken switching and Lowest
manual switching

If a higher level protection switching exists, lower level switching cannot be


executed successfully. But if only the lower level switching exists, it can be
executed successfully.

11.2.4 Front Panel


Figure 11-4 shows the front panel of the OLP.

11-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

OLP

RUN

ALM

TO1 RI1

TO2 RI2

TI RO

Figure 11-4 Front panel of the OLP

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OLP.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the OLP.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-9


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

TI/RO LC Connects with the FIU and access line signals.


TO1/TO2 LC Transmits working and protection signals to the line
fibre.
RI1/RI2 LC Receives working and protection signals from the line
fibre.

11.2.5 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the OLP.

Corresponding interfaces Item Unit Value

TI-TO1 Signal splitter insertion loss dB <4


TI-TO2
RI1-RO Signal selection insertion loss dB <1.5
RI2-RO
Range of the input optical power dBm 7 to 35
Alarm threshold of optical power difference dB 3
Switching threshold of optical power difference dB 5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OLP.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

OLP 7.0 W 7.7 W

11-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OLP.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)


Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
Weight 0.8 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1IU6, IU8IU13

11.3 SCS
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the SCS board.

11.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the SCS.

Functionality Description

Basic function Coordinated with the active or standby OTU, the SCS fulfils
optical channel protection. The SCS also supports OTU board
level protection of the same route.
The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not
need the support of protocol. Instead, the channel protection
executes switching by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

11.3.2 Working Principle


Figure 11-5 is a typical application of the SCS in the system.
Active channel
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
SCS SCS
Rx Tx
Rx Tx
Standby channel

Figure 11-5 SCS in the OptiX BWS 1600G

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-11


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

Note
The diagram shows the implementation of dual-fed and signal selection for one
channel of optical signal.

Figure 11-6 shows the principle block diagram of the SCS.

TI1
TO11
Dual-fed module
TO12

RO1 RI11
Selection module
RI12

TI2
TO21
Dual-fed module
TO22

RO2 RI21
Selection module
RI22

Figure 11-6 Principle block diagram of the SCS

A single SCS can select dual-fed signals for two channels of optical signals. The
processing of these two channels of optical signals are the same.
Below describes the process.
The system uses two SCS boards. The first SCS splits coming services into two
signals with equal power.
The first SCS sends the signals to the working and protection OTUs.
After transmission over the working path and the protection path to the receive
end, the working and protection OTUs convert the wavelengths.
The other SCS combines the wavelengths and transmits these wavelengths to
the client side.
With two SCS boards, the system selectively accepts the dual-fed signals. Also, the
system triggers the protection switching when LOS and B_EXC alarms are
reported.
In normal conditions, the working OTU at the receive end is in the working status
and the protection OTU the idle. When the service fails, the protection switching is
triggered by alarms. The system turns off the client-side transmitting laser of the
working OTU and turn on that of the protection OTU.

11.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 11-7 shows the front panel of the SCS.

11-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

SCS

RUN

ALM

TO11 RI11

TO21 RI21
TO12 RI12

TO22 RI22
TI1 RO1

TI2 RO2

Figure 11-7 Front panel of the SCS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the SCS.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-13


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the SCS.

Interface Connector Description


type

TI1 LC Transmits the first channel of client-side signals.


RO1 LC Receives the first channel of client-side signals.
TI2 LC Transmits the second channel of client-side signals.
RO2 LC Receives the second channel of client-side signals.
TO11/TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to working and
protection OTUs.
TO21/TO22 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to working
and protection OTUs.
RI11/RI12 LC Receives the first channel of signals from working
and protection OTUs.
RI21/RI22 LC Receives the second channel of signals from working
and protection OTUs.

11.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the SCS.

Item Unit Value

Single-mode insertion loss dB <4


Multimode insertion loss dB <4.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the SCS.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

SCS 4.3 W 4.7 W

11-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the SCS.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (length) x 218.5 mm (width) x 2 mm


(thickness)
Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (length) x 38 mm (width)
Weight 0.7 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1 IU6, IU8 IU13

11.4 PBU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the PBU board.

11.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the PBU.

Functionality Description

Basic function The PBU provides centralised protection for OTUs power
supply.
The PBU can protect three types of power supplies (3.3 V, 5 V,
and 5.2 V) of two OTUs at the same time.
If three or more OTUs need protection, the backup function will
fail, and all OTUs will not be protected.
Protection scheme When any of the secondary power modules (3.3 V, 5 V, and 5.2
V) provided by the OTU fails, services can be switched to the
PBU within 600 s. This realises board level protection and
ensures normal operation of the OTU.
Cool power backup The PBU adopts cool power backup. When the power supply of
the OTU works normally, the backup power module on the PBU
is idle.
Slow-startup The OTU backup circuit on the PBU supports slow-startup. The
slow-startup time of the OTU backup circuit is longer than that
of an OTU working circuit. This ensures that the OTU is
supplied with power by the working power supply when started.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-15


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

Caution
When the OTU and PBU both work normally, swapping the PBU does not affect
the work of the system and the OTU.

11.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 11-8 shows the principle block diagram of the PBU.

5V
Power to the back
-48V switching 3.3V
plane
module -5.2V

Voltage
detection

CPU

Communication
module

SCC

Figure 11-8 Principle block diagram of the PBU

The PBU consists of three parts:


Power switching module
The power switching module consists of a slow-startup and filter circuit. This
circuit converts 48 V DC into three types of power supplies (3.3 V, 5 V and 5.2 V)
required by the OTU and sends the power to the backplane. Besides, the power
switching module supplies power for the control and peripheral circuits of this
board.
Voltage detection module
The voltage detection module checks the three types of power (3.3V, 5V, and 5.2V)
output from the power switching module, and reports alarms in the case of
overvoltage or undervoltage.
Control system
The control and information processing part consists of a CPU and a
communication module. The CPU monitors the status of the power module on this
board.
Handling of continuous overvoltage at the output side of the power module:

11-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description 11 Protection Units

If the OTU uses the backup power, and continuous overvoltage occurs, check
whether the power module is abnormal with detection module and software. If so,
an alarm is given without shutdown of the power.
If the OTU does not use the backup power, but continuous overvoltage occurs to the
backup power, an alarm is given and the output of the power module is shut down.
The output of any faulty circuit is shut down (other two are not shut down).

11.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 11-9 shows the front panel of the PBU.

PBU

RUN

ALM

PBU

Figure 11-9 Front panel of the PBU

Indicators
There are three indicators on the front panel of the PBU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-17


OptiX BWS 1600G
11 Protection Units Hardware Description

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator
PBU Yellow PBU running indicator

See Appendix A for details.

11.4.4 Technical Specifications


Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the PBU.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

PBU 145.0 W 160.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the PBU.

Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (length) x 218.5 mm (width) x 2 mm


(thickness)
Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (length) x 38 mm (width)
Weight 1.0 kg
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU1

11-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System
Hardware Description Control and Communication Unit

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System


Control and Communication Unit

According to ITU-T Recommendations, the OptiX BWS 1600G adopts the optical
supervisory channel with the carrier wavelength being 1510nm and 1625nm. The
board that processes this channel is called optical supervisory channel processing
board or supervisory board. The supervisory board monitors the optical channels,
collects and transmits the orderwire and T2000 information.
The optical supervisory channel and the main channel adopt WDM mode in
transmission. The multiplexing and demultiplexing of the two are implemented by
an FIU board.
A system control and communication board (SCC) is the control centre of the
OptiX BWS 1600G. The SCC manages the whole system, and communicates
between the equipment and network management system. The SCC also processes
the orderwire overhead.
There is also a special SCC for the extended subrack, shorted as SCE. The only
difference is that the SCE does not have the overhead processing function.
This chapter describes the optical supervisory units and the SCC of the OptiX BWS
1600G in terms of:

Functionality
Working principle
Front panel
Technical specifications

Note
The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify
the positions and silkscreen of the optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-1


12 Optical Supervisory Units and System OptiX BWS 1600G
Control and Communication Unit Hardware Description

12.1 SC1/SC2
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the SC1 board
and the SC2 board.

12.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the SC1 and the SC2.

Functionality Description

SC1 SC2

Basic function The SC1 is a uni-directional optical The SC2 is a bi-directional


supervisory channel unit, used in OTMs. supervisory channel unit, used in
The SC1 processes one supervisory an OLA, OADM, OEQ, or REG.
channel. The SC2 processes two
supervisory channels.
Technology The optical supervisory channel (OSC) does not limit the pump wavelength of
characteristic optical amplifier.
The OSC does not limit the distance between two optical line amplifiers.
The OSC does not restrict the service in 1310nm.
When the line amplifier is faulty, the optical supervisory channel is still
available.
The SC1or the SC2 is independent of the SCC, that is, even if the SCC is not in
position, The SC1or the SC2 can pass through the ECC and ensure the
supervision on other stations.
Regeneration function The SC1 is transmitted in sections, with 3R function. In each optical line
amplifier, the information can be correctly received, and new supervisory
information can be attached as well.
Wavelength The signal wavelength of supervisory channel in the OptiX BWS 1600G
systems I, II, III, V and VI is 1510 nm; while the wavelength of supervisory
signal in system IV is 1625 nm.

12.1.2 Working Principle


As the SC1 and the SC2 are the same in principle, more about the SC1 is discussed
in this section. The SC2, are the same with the SC1 in hardware, function and
application. But the SC2 can process one more optical supervisory channel.
Figure 12-1 shows the principle block diagram of the SC1.

12-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System
Hardware Description Control and Communication Unit

SCC board

Optical Overhead Optical


RM TM
receiving processing transmitting
module module module

CPU

Communication
module

SCC board

Figure 12-1 Principle block diagram of the SC1

Receiving module and transmitting module


The receiving module receives optical supervisory signal and the transmitting
module transmits optical supervisory signal.
Overhead processing module
The overhead processing module exchanges information with the SCC. It extracts
overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends the bytes to the SCC for
processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, the overhead
processing module sends the electrical signals into the optical transmitting module.
The overhead processing module also monitors performance and alarms, such as
CRC4 bit errors counting, remote and out-of-frame alarm reporting.
CPU
CPU collects the performance and alarm information about the SC1 and reports to
the SCC through the communication module. The CPU also implements other
functions such as A/D conversion, environment temperature monitoring, and
interface control (that is, laser shutdown, running and alarm indicators flashing).
Besides, The CPU provides clock signals with appropriate frequency and phases
for the nodes in the system.

12.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 12-2 shows the front panel of the SC1 and the SC2.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-3


12 Optical Supervisory Units and System OptiX BWS 1600G
Control and Communication Unit Hardware Description

SC1 SC2

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

TM RM TM1 TM2

RM1 RM2

Figure 12-2 Front panel of the SC1 and the SC2

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the SC1 or the SC2.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

12-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System
Hardware Description Control and Communication Unit

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SC1.

Interface Connector type Description

TM LC Transmits the supervisory channel.


RM LC Receives the supervisory channel.

There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SC2.

Interface Connector type Description

TM1/TM2 LC Transmits the supervisory channel.


RM1/RM2 LC Receives the supervisory channel.

12.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the SC1 and the SC2.

Parameters Specifications

Type Normal power High power


Working wavelength range (nm) C band: 15001520 or C band: 15001520
L band: 16151635
Signal rate (Mbit/s) SC1/SC2 2.048 (Note1) 2.048 (Note1)
TC1/TC2 8.192 (Note2) 8.192 (Note2)
Line code format CMI CMI
Launched power (dBm) 7 to 0 5 to 10
Optical source type MLM LD MLM LD
Minimum receiver SC1/SC2 48 48
sensitivity (dBm)
(BER=110-12) TC1/TC2 48 48
Note1: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding. After CMI encoding the signal rate on the line would be 4
Mbit/s.
Note2: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding. After CMI encoding the signal rate on the line would be 16
Mbit/s.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-5


12 Optical Supervisory Units and System OptiX BWS 1600G
Control and Communication Unit Hardware Description

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the SC1 and the SC2.

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

SC1 4.0 W 4.4 W


SC2 7.0 W 7.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the SC1 and the SC2.

Item Specification

SC1 SC2

Weight 0.9 kg 1.0 kg


Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)
Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU6, IU8

12.2 TC1/TC2
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the TC1 board
and the TC2 board.

12.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the TC1 and the TC2.

Functionality Description

TC1 TC2

Basic function The TC1 is a unidirectional optical The TC2 is a bidirectional


supervisory channel and timing supervisory channel unit, used in
transmission unit, used in OTMs. the OLA, REG, OEQ and OADM.
The TC1 receives or transmits the optical The TC2 receives or transmits the
signal from or to one direction at the optical signals from or to two
terminal station. directions.
Processes and regenerates the supervisory channel as the SC1 and the SC2.
Besides, the TC1 and the TC2 also provide the clock transmission function.

12-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System
Hardware Description Control and Communication Unit

Functionality Description

TC1 TC2

Clock transmission Adds or drops 3-channel E1 clock service, and provides the electrical interface
function for the external synchronous signal and the timing source for the synchronous
equipment. The clock interface has the 2.048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz interface
physical characteristics defined by the ITU-I G.703.
Overhead processing Processes the synchronous information status byte:
y Judges the synchronous timing quality level according to S1 byte content.
y Reports synchronous status information.
If the upper stream clock signal is missing, add clock invalid information to
notify clock receiving equipment downstream.
Protection schemes Provides 1+1 board protection at equipment level (two TC1/TC2 boards
plugged in slots 6 and 8, active/standby protection for each other) and
redundancy protection with double optical wavelengths.
Supervisory information and clock signals are transmitted in both 1510 nm and
1625 nm.

12.2.2 Working Principle


In the OptiX BWS 1600G, the TC2 provides an 8 Mbit/s channel. In this optical
supervisory channel, overhead bytes and three 2 Mbit/s clock signals are
transmitted, so that all optical repeaters can be managed by the T2000. Besides, the
TC2 can also transmit or provide the clock to other network equipment.
The TC1 or the TC2 processes the overhead and network clock signal in the
supervisory channel. The processing of overhead is the same with that in the SC1 or
SC2.
Since the principles of TC1 and TC2 are the same, this section describes only the
TC1 board.
Figure 12-3 shows the principle block diagram of the TC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-7


12 Optical Supervisory Units and System OptiX BWS 1600G
Control and Communication Unit Hardware Description

Clock interface

Clock processing module

SCC
TM
RM Transmitting
Receiving Overhead processing
module module module

CPU

communication SCC
module

Figure 12-3 Principle block diagram of the TC1

Compared with the SC1, a clock processing module is added to the TC1. The clock
processing module realises the clock generation, clock extraction and clock
synchronisation for the optical supervisory channel. This module is connected to
clock interfaces for inputting and outputting external clock signals.
The TC1 has similar modules as the SC1 except the clock processing module.

12.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 12-4 shows the front panel of the TC1 and the TC2.

12-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System
Hardware Description Control and Communication Unit

TC1 TC2

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

TM RM TM1 TM2

RM1 RM2

Figure 12-4 Front panel of the TC1 and the TC2

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TC1 or the TC2.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-9


12 Optical Supervisory Units and System OptiX BWS 1600G
Control and Communication Unit Hardware Description

Interface Connector type Description

TM LC Transmits the supervisory channel signal.


RM LC Receives the supervisory channel signal.

There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TC2.

Interface Connector type Description

TM1/TM2 LC Transmits the supervisory channel signal.


RM1/RM2 LC Receives the supervisory channel signal.

12.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the TC1 and the TC2.

Parameters Specifications

Type Normal power High power


Working wavelength range (nm) C band: 15001520 or C band: 15001520
L band: 16151635
Signal rate (Mbit/s) SC1/SC2 2.048 (Note1) 2.048 (Note1)
TC1/TC2 8.192 (Note2) 8.192 (Note2)
Line code format CMI CMI
Launched power (dBm) 7 to 0 5 to 10
Optical source type MLM LD MLM LD
Minimum receiver SC1/SC2 48 48
sensitivity (dBm)
(BER=110-12) TC1/TC2 48 48
Note1: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding. After CMI encoding the signal rate on the line would be 4
Mbit/s.
Note2: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding. After CMI encoding the signal rate on the line would be 16
Mbit/s.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the TC1 and the TC2.

12-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System
Hardware Description Control and Communication Unit

Board Maximum power Maximum power consumption at


consumption at 250C 550C

TC1 8.5 W 9.4 W


TC2 11.5 W 12.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the TC1 and the TC2.

Item Specification

TC1 TC2

Weight 0.9 kg 1.1 kg


Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)
Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W)
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU6, IU8

12.3 SCC/SCE
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the SCC board
and the SCE board.
The SCE applies to the extended subrack. The principle and function of the SCE
are the same with that of the SCC. But the SCE has no overhead processing
module.

12.3.1 Functionality
Figure 12-5 shows the logical functional block of the SCC.
Sn

SEMF

F Interface P D4-D12
MCF N D1-D3

Q Interface

Figure 12-5 Logical functional block diagram of SCC

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-11


12 Optical Supervisory Units and System OptiX BWS 1600G
Control and Communication Unit Hardware Description

SEMF
The main function of synchronous equipment management function (SEMF) is to
work with the T2000 of the OptiX BWS 1600G to manage the boards. The SEMF
functional block exchanges management information with other functional blocks
through the reference point. The SEMF also converts, processes and stores the
performance data and alarm events received from other functional blocks. At the
same time, The SEMF transmits the control and management information to other
functional blocks of the equipment.
MCF
Message communication function (MCF) transmits various maintenance and
management messages between the NMS and NE equipment, or among NEs. These
messages are sent over D1D12 bytes of optical supervisory channel.
The MCF also provides OAM interfaces so that the OptiX BWS 1600G can
communicate data between the synchronisation equipment and the T2000.
In an OptiX BWS 1600G NE, only one SCC board enables MCF function through
the communication with the supervisory channel board. And the SCE board on
other subracks in the NE exchanges information with the SCC through 10M
Ethernet interfaces. Because the SCE communicates with other NE equipment
indirectly. The SCE manages on boards in the same subrack, as mentioned before.
The SCE reports the performance and alarm data to and receives management
information from the SCC.
Software function
The BIOS software serves to:
Boot the system.
Load and upgrade NE software.
Perform hardware self-test of the SCC.
The NE software serves to perform real time monitoring, maintenance and
management on the NEs by working with the T2000 and the SCC hardware.
The NE software consists of a communication module (CM) and an administration
module (AM).
The CM:
Handles the message communication.
Transmits the operation, management, as well as maintenance information
between the T2000 and NE equipment, or between NEs.
While the AM:
Manages the synchronisation equipment.
Supports configuration, alarm, performance, security, and topology
management of NMS.

12-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System
Hardware Description Control and Communication Unit

12.3.2 Working principle


Figure 12-6 shows the principle block diagram of the SCC board.
Optical supervisory boards

DCC
interface

Date Overhead
NM communication CPU access
interface module

Communication
module

Other boards

Figure 12-6 Principle block diagram of the SCC

12.3.3 Functional Interfaces


The SCC provides functional interfaces to facilitate the communication between
the functional modules of each board and the network management (NM), as shown
in Table 12-1.

Table 12-1 Description of the functional interfaces of the SCC in the OptiX BWS 1600G
system
Functional interface Description

F&f (Note) Connect the RS-232 interface to a PC or a workstation for commissioning.


Ethernet (Note) TMN interface, local NE management interface, and internal communication
interface, used for commissioning.
OAM (Note) The operation, administration and maintenance interface. The X.25 interface is
provided to communicate with the terminal through the public packet switched
network.
F1 (Note) Provides three orderwire phones and a 64 kbit/s co-directional data channel.
F2 (Note) Uses the F2 byte of the supervisory channel and possesses the features of both
RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces. This interface can be used for express orderwire.
The maximum rate is 19.2 kbit/s.
F3 (Note) Uses the F3 byte of the supervisory channel and possesses the features of both

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-13


12 Optical Supervisory Units and System OptiX BWS 1600G
Control and Communication Unit Hardware Description

Functional interface Description


RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces. This interface can be used for express orderwire.
The maximum rate is 19.2 kbit/s.
RS485 Communicates with other boards in the subrack. (reserved)
DCC communication Provides the data communication channel (DCC) of the supervisory link.
Communication Communicates with other boards in the subrack, collects performance data, and
module delivers the configuration.
Qx Network management communication interface.
Note: To fulfill the functions of the SCC board, corresponding physical interfaces are provided in the interface area of the OptiX
BWS 1600G subrack. For detailed description, refer to OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description.

12.3.4 Front Panel


Figure 12-7 shows the front panel of the SCC and the SCE.

12-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System
Hardware Description Control and Communication Unit

SCC SCE

RUN RUN

ALM ALM

ETN ETN

RST RST

ALC ALC

Figure 12-7 Front panel of the SCC and the SCE

Indicators
There are three indicators on the front panel of the SCC or the SCE.

Indicator Colour Description

RUN Green Running status indicator


ALM Red Alarm status indicator
Ethernet Yellow Ethernet status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 12-15


12 Optical Supervisory Units and System OptiX BWS 1600G
Control and Communication Unit Hardware Description

Switches
There are two switches on the front panel of the SCC or the SCE.

Interface Description

RST Is used to reset a board,


ALC Is used to activate or deactivate the alarm buzzer which is located at the
top of the cabinet.

12.3.5 Technical Specifications


Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the SCC and the SCE.

Board Maximum power consumption Maximum power consumption


at 250C at 550C

SCC 10.5 W 11.5 W


SCE 10.5 W 11.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the SCC and the SCE.

Item Specification

SCC SCE

Weight 0.8 kg 0.8 kg


Dimensions of board (PCB) 321 mm (length) x 218.5 mm (width) x 2 mm
(thickness)
Dimensions of front panel 345 mm (length) x 24 mm (width)
The number of slots occupied 1
Slots to hold the board IU7

12-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description A Indicators

A Indicators

A.1 Cabinet Indicators


There are three indicators of different colors on each cabinet: red, orange and green
indicators. Table A-1 lists the related messages of each indicator.

Table A-1 Cabinet indicators


Indicator Level/ State
Category ON OFF

Red Critical alarm There is a critical alarm. An There is no critical


audio signal is also generated. alarm.
Orange Major alarm There is a major alarm. No There is no major
audio signal is generated with alarm.
it.
Green Power supply Power supply is normal. Power supply is not
indicator normal.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
A Indicators Hardware Description

A.2 Board Indicators


A.2.1 Alarm Indicator
A red indicator on the front panel of each board shows system alarms. Table A-2
lists the related messages and descriptions.

Table A-2 Red alarm indicator


Flash state Description

Off There is no alarm.


Flash quickly (SCC) There is an incoming orderwire call.
Three times every other second There is a critical alarm.
Twice every other second There is a major alarm.
Once every other second There is a minor alarm.
On Hardware is faulty, or the self-check fails.

A.2.2 Running Indicator


A green indicator on the front panel of each board shows running state of the system.
Table A-3 lists the related messages and descriptions.

Table A-3 Green running indicator


Flash state Description

Flash five times per second The board is not in service.


Flash once every other second The board is in service (normal).
2 seconds on and 2 seconds off The communication with the SCC unit stops,
and the board is in off-line working state.

Table A-4 shows the running state of the SCC.

Table A-4 Green running Indicator on the SCC


Flash state Description

Flash five times per second The board is in off-line working state after the
reset, or in self-check state.
Flash once every other second The board is in service (normal).

A-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description A Indicators

A.2.3 Communication Indicator


A orange indicator on the front panel of SCC/SCE board is the Ethernet
communication indicator. Table A-5 lists the related messages and descriptions.

Table A-5 Orange indicator


Flash state Description

Off The connection between NE and NM computer is abnormal or


broken.
On The connection between NE and NM computer is normal.
Flashing There is data transmitted between gateway NE and NM computer.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-3


OptiX BWS 1600G B Power Consumption and Weight of the
Hardware Description Boards

B Power Consumption and Weight of the


Boards

Table B-1 lists the power consumption and weight of boards. Note that the power
consumption values are measured in normal working conditions (25C) and under
temperature of 55C.

Table B-1 OptiX BWS 1600G equipment board information


Board Maximum power Maximum power Weight Slots
consumption at 250C (W) consumption at 550C (W) (kg) occupied

E3LWF 27.1 29.8 1.4 1


E2LWF 32.9 36.2 1.6 1
E3LWFS 40.0 44.0 1.4 1
E2LWFS 41.7 45.8 1.7 1
TMX 42.0 46.2 1.8 2
TMXS 46.4 51.0 1.8 2
LWC1 21.5 23.6 1.1 1
LDG 29.5 33.0 1.0 1
FDG 34.5 38.0 1.0 1
LBE 31.6 34.8 1.4 1
LBES 44.3 48.7 1.7 1
LWX 27.0 29.7 1.0 1
LWM 27.0 29.7 1.0 1
TMR 22.3 24.5 1.3 1
TMRS 35.0 38.5 1.3 1
TRC1 21.5 23.0 1.0 1

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-1


B Power Consumption and Weight of the OptiX BWS 1600G
Boards Hardware Description

Board Maximum power Maximum power Weight Slots


consumption at 250C (W) consumption at 550C (W) (kg) occupied

M40 / D40 20.0 22.0 1.6 2


V40 46.0 50.6 2.2 2
MR2 7.0 7.7 1.1 2
DWC 16.0 17.6 0.9 2
ITL 30.0 33.0 2.0 1
FIU 4.3 4.8 0.9 1
E2OAU 42.0 70.0 2.4 2
E3OAU 30.0 50.0 2.4 2
E3OBU 23.0 30.0 2.2 2
E2OBU 35.0 50.0 2.2 2
OPU 20.0 22.0 2.0 2
HBA 24.0 26.4 2.6 2
RPC 70.0 77.0 4.2 2
RPA 90.0 99.0 4.2 2
MCA 7.0 7.7 1.7 2
VA4 10.0 11.0 1.5 2
VOA 6.5 7.2 0.8 1
DGE 20.0 22.0 2.4 2
DSE 4.3 4.8 0.9 1
GFU 4.3 4.8 0.9 1
TC1 8.5 9.4 0.9 1
TC2 11.5 12.7 1.1 1
SC1 4.0 4.4 0.9 1
SC2 7.0 7.7 1.0 1
SCC / SCE 10.5 11.5 0.8 1
OCP 8.0 8.8 1.7 2
OLP 7.0 7.7 0.8 1
SCS 4.3 4.7 0.7 1
PBU 145.0 159.5 1.0 1

B-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description C Glossary

C Glossary

This document defines the following terms:

A
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown.
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
Attenuator A passive component that produces a controlled signal attenuation in an optical fiber
transmission line.
Automatic gain A technique which is used to adjust the gain of each wavelength signal within
control technology allowed range.

B
BER Bit Error Rate. The number of errors expected in a transmission.
C
Channel spacing The centre-to-centre difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent
channels in a WDM device.
CRZ Chirped Return To Zero.
D
DCC Data Communication Channel.
Within an STM-N signal there are two DCC channels, comprising bytes D1-D3,
giving a 192 kbit/s channel, and bytes D4-D12, giving a 576 kbit/s channel. D1-D3
(DCCR) are accessible by all SDH NEs whereas D4-D12 (DCCM), not being part of
the regenerator section overhead, are not accessible at regenerators.
Distributed services The transmitting services are distributed between each neighboring nodes connected
over a ring network.
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. DWDM technology utilizes the
characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber,
employs multiple wavelengths with spacing of 100GHz or 50GHz as carriers, and
allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
C Glossary Hardware Description

E
ECC y Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations channel
between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical
layer.
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier. Optical fiber doped with the rare earth element
erbium, which can amplify at 1530 to 1610 nm when pumped by an external light
source.
ESC Electric Supervisory Channel. It owns the same function with OSC to realize the
communication among all the nodes and transmit the monitoring data in the optical
transmission network. The difference is monitoring data of ESC is introduced into
DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a
broadcast networking technology that can use several different physical media,
including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD.
TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet networks.
F
FEC Forward Error Correction. Method to detect and correct certain error conditions with
redundant coding.
Fiber-spooling Fiber-spooling is used to coil up redundant fiber jumpers.
G
Gain In an OA which is externally connected to an input jumper fiber. The increase of
signal optical power from the output end of the jumper fiber to the OA output port,
expressed in dB.
J
Jitter Variations in a short waveform caused by voltage fluctuations.
L
LAN Local Area Network. A collection of devices connected to enable communications
between themselves on a single physical medium.
N
NE y Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity that supports at least network
element functions and may also support operations system function or mediation
functions. It contains managed objects, a message communication function and a
management applications function.
NM Network Management. Any aspect of monitoring or controlling a network, including
all administration details.
NRZ Non Return to Zero. A digital code in which the signal level is low for a 0 bit and
high for a 1 bit and dose not return to 0 between successive 1 bits.
O

C-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description C Glossary

OCP Optical Channel Protection. With the way to back up the working optical channel, it
supports primary channel with multiple wavelengths and standby one in order to be
against the situation that there is any fault in the primary channel.
OC-x Optical Carrier. A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard.
OLA Optical Line Amplifier. A device that amplifies an input optical signal without
converting it into electrical form. The best developed are optical fiber doped with the
rare-earth element erbium.
OLP Optical Line Protection. With the way to back up the working link, it supports
primary optical transmitting link with multiple wavelengths and standby one in order
to be against the situation that there is any fault in the primary link.
Optical amplifier A device or subsystem in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the
stimulated emission taking place in an suitable active medium. In this active medium
a population inversion, needed to advantage stimulated emission with respect to
absorption, is achieved and maintained by means of a suitable pumping system.
Optical connector A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus for the
purpose of providing frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers
or cables.
Optical coupler A term which is used as a synonym for a branching device. The term is also used to
define a structure for transferring optical power between two fibers or between an
active device and a fiber.
Optical A device which performs the inverse operation of a wavelength multiplexer, where
demultiplexer the input is an optical signal comprising two or more wavelength ranges and the
output of each port is a different preselected wavelength range.
Optical multiplexer A branching device with two or more input ports and one output port where the light
in each input port is restricted to a preselected wavelength range and the output is the
combination of the light from the input ports.
Optical spectrum An instrument that scans the spectrum to record power as a function of wavelength.
analyzer
Optical switch A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits,
redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
OSNR Output Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio (applicable to optically amplified transmitters
only). The ratio of the optical signal power to the optical noise power at the OAT
output port, measured over a specified optical bandwidth.
P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy. It is the first multiplexing hierarchy used in digital
transmission systems. The base frequency was 64Kbit/s, multiplexed up to 2048,
8448, 34,368 and 139,264 kbit/s. There was more than one standard system and it
varied between Europe, the US and Japan.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
C Glossary Hardware Description

R
Ring network Type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be a cycle.
ROADM Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can block or pass
through any wavelength channel carrying the multiplexing signals so as to
implement the reconfiguration of the corresponding wavelength in the main optical
path. Therefore, it can configure flexibly and dynamically the wavelength resource
among each node in the network under the situation not to impact the running of the
working channel.
S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures,
standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical
transmission networks.
SuperWDM A technical solution can extend effectively the transmitting distance of DWDM
system with the application of Super CRZ encoding and the advanced phase
modulation capability.
T
Telecom The entity which provides the means used to transport and process information
management related to management functions for the telecommunications network.
network
V
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator. An attenuator in which the attenuation can be varied.
W
WDM y Wavelength Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics
of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs
multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit
simultaneously in a single fiber.

C-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description D Acronyms and Abbreviations

D Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AFEC Advanced Forward Error Correction
AGC Automatic Gain Control
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APE Automatic Power Equilibrium
ASE Amplified Spontaneous Emission
AWG Arrayed Waveguide Grating
B
BA Booster Amplifier
BER Bit Error Ratio
C
CLNS Connectionless Network Layer Service
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check
CRZ Chirped Return to Zero
CSES Continuous Severely Errored Second
D
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary D-1


OptiX BWS 1600G
D Acronyms and Abbreviations Hardware Description

DDN Digital Data Network


DFB Distributed Feedback
DSP Digital Signal Processing
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EFEC Enhanced Forward Error Correction
ELH Extra Long Haul
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute
F
FEC Forward Error Correction
FIFO First In First Out
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FWM Four-Wave Mixing
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GUI Graphical User Interface
I
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
ITU-T Telecommunication Sector
L
LAN Local Area Network
LCN Local Communication Network
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LD Laser Diode
M
MCF Message Communication Function
MD Mediation Device
MPI-R Main Path Interface at the Receiver
MPI-S Main Path Interface at the Transmitter

D-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description D Acronyms and Abbreviations

MQW Multi Quantum Well


N
NE Network Element
NF Noise Figure
NRZ Non Return to Zero
O
OA Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OD Optical Demultiplexing
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
OEQ Optical Equalizer
OHP Overhead Processing
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OM Optical Multiplexing
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
ORL Optical Return Loss
OS Operations System
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSNR Optical Signal/Noise Ratio
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
OTS Optical Transmission Section
OTU Optical Transponder Unit
OTUk Optical Channel Transport Unit(G.709)
P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDL Polarization Dependent Loss
PIN Positive Intrinsic Negative
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
PON Passive Optical Network
POS Packet Over SDH/SONET

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary D-3


OptiX BWS 1600G
D Acronyms and Abbreviations Hardware Description

R
RS Reed-Solomon
Q
QA Q Adaptation
S
SBS Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
SCC System Control & Communication
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SPM Self Phase Modulation
SRS Stimulated Raman Scattering
STM Synchronous Transport Module
T
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TEC Thermoelectric Cool
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
U
UAT Unavailable Time
X
XPM Cross Phase Modulation
W
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex
WS Work Station

D-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Index

Index

A functionality, 9-19
DGE board
abbreviation, D-1 front panel, 9-13
acronym, D-1 functionality, 9-12
appearance technical specification, 9-15
board, 5-4 working principle, 9-12
DSE board
B front panel, 9-16
board functionality, 9-16
appearance, 5-4 technical specification, 9-18
indicator, A-2 working principle, 9-16
overview, 5-1 DWC board
power consumption, B-1 front panel, 7-16
type, 5-1 functionality, 7-14
weight, B-1 technical specification, 7-17
working principle, 7-15
C
E
cabinet
capacity, 1-4 EDFA, 8-1
ETSI cabinet, 1-2
indicator, A-1 F
parameter, 1-4 FAN, 3-5
structure, 1-2 fan tray assembly. see FAN
connector FDG board
DB9, 3-4 functionality, 6-59
plug-in, 3-4 technical specification, 6-62
RJ45, 3-3, 3-4 working principle, 6-59
FIU board
D front panel, 7-25
D40 board functionality, 7-23
front panel, 7-7 technical specification, 7-28
functionality, 7-6 type, 7-22
technical specification, 7-9 working principle, 7-23
working principle, 7-7 FMU board
DCM, 4-1 front panel, 10-4
DCM frame, 4-2 functionality, 10-2
DFU board technical specification, 10-5

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1


OptiX BWS 1600G
Index Hardware Description

working principle, 10-3 functionality, 6-59


frame technical specification, 6-62
DCM, 4-2 working principle, 6-59
HUB, 4-4 LOG board
front panel, 6-66
G functionality, 6-64
GFU board technical specification, 6-67
front panel, 9-20 working principle, 6-65
technical specification, 9-22 LOGS board
working principle, 9-19 front panel, 6-66
functionality, 6-64
H technical specification, 6-67
working principle, 6-65
HBA board LRF board
front panel, 8-21 front panel, 6-10
functionality, 8-20 functionality, 6-8
technical specification, 8-23 technical specification, 6-11
working principle, 8-20 working principle, 6-9
HUB frame, 4-4 LRFS board
front panel, 6-10
I functionality, 6-8
indicator technical specification, 6-11
alarm, A-2 working principle, 6-9
communication, A-3 LWC1 board
running, A-2 front panel, 6-30
interface functionality, 6-29
power box, 2-5 technical specification, 6-32
subrack, 3-3 working principle, 6-29
ITL board LWF board
front panel, 7-20 front panel, 6-4
functionality, 7-19 functionality, 6-2
parameter description, 7-21 technical specification, 6-5
technical specification, 7-21 working principle, 6-3
working principle, 7-19 LWFS board
front panel, 6-4
L functionality, 6-2
technical specification, 6-5
LBE board
working principle, 6-3
front panel, 6-15
LWM board
functionality, 6-13
front panel, 6-41
technical specification, 6-16
functionality, 6-39
working principle, 6-14
technical specification, 6-42
LBES board
working principle, 6-40
front panel, 6-15
LWMR board
functionality, 6-13
front panel, 6-45
technical specification, 6-16
functionality, 6-44
working principle, 6-14
technical specification, 6-47
LDG board
working principle, 6-45
front panel, 6-60

2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Index

LWX board OAU05, parameter, 8-7


front panel, 6-50 OBU board
functionality, 6-48 front panel, 8-12
technical specification, 6-51 functionality, 8-11
working principle, 6-49 technical specification, 8-14
LWXR board working principle, 8-12
front panel, 6-55 OBUC03
functionality, 6-54 parameter, 8-15
technical specification, 6-57 OBUC05
working principle, 6-54 parameter, 8-15
OCP board
M front panel, 11-3
M40 board functionality, 11-2
front panel, 7-3 technical specification, 11-5
functionality, 7-2 working principle, 11-2
technical specification, 7-5 OLP board
working principle, 7-2 front panel, 11-8
MCA board functionality, 11-6
front panel, 9-3 switch type, 11-7
functionality, 9-2 technical specification, 11-10
technical specification, 9-4 working principle, 11-6
working principle, 9-2 OPU board
MR2 board front panel, 8-17
front panel, 7-11 functionality, 8-16
functionality, 7-10 technical specification, 8-18
technical specification, 7-13 working principle, 8-17
working principle, 7-10
MWA board
P
front panel, 10-9 parameter
functionality, 10-7 cabinet, 1-4
technical specification, 10-11 power box, 2-9
working principle, 10-7 subrack, 3-6, 4-2
MWF board PBU board
front panel, 10-14 front panel, 11-17
functionality, 10-12 functionality, 11-15
technical specification, 10-17 working principle, 11-16
working principle, 10-13 power box
alarm interface, 2-5
O DIP switch, 2-4
OAMS, 10-1 function, 2-1
OAU interface, 2-5
CG/LG parameter, 8-6 panel description, 2-2
OAU board parameter, 2-9
front panel, 8-3 serial interface, 2-5
functionality, 8-2 power consumption
technical specification, 8-6 board, B-1
working principle, 8-3 cabinet, 1-4
subrack, 3-6

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3


OptiX BWS 1600G
Index Hardware Description

R T
Raman amplifier, 8-1, 8-24 TC1 board
front panel, 8-26 front panel, 12-8
functionality, 8-24 functionality, 12-6
technical specification, 8-27 technical specification, 12-10
working principle, 8-25 working principle, 12-7
TC2 board
S front panel, 12-8
SC1 board functionality, 12-6
front panel, 12-3 technical specification, 12-10
functionality, 12-2 working principle, 12-7
technical specification, 12-5 TMR board
working principle, 12-2 front panel, 6-25
SC2 board functionality, 6-24
front panel, 12-3 technical specification, 6-27
functionality, 12-2 working principle, 6-25
technical specification, 12-5 TMRS board
working principle, 12-2 front panel, 6-25
SCC functionality, 6-24
communication indicator, A-3 technical specification, 6-27
running state, A-2 working principle, 6-25
SCC board TMX board
front panel, 12-13 front panel, 6-20
functionality, 12-11 functionality, 6-18
technical specification, 12-15 technical specification, 6-21
working principle, 12-13 working principle, 6-19
SCC indicator TMXS board
running. see also indicator running front panel, 6-20
SCE board functionality, 6-18
front panel, 12-13 technical specification, 6-21
functionality, 12-11 working principle, 6-19
technical specification, 12-15 TRC1 board
working principle, 12-13 front panel, 6-36
SCS board functionality, 6-35
front panel, 11-12 technical specification, 6-38
functionality, 11-11 working principle, 6-36
technical specification, 11-14, 11-18
working principle, 11-11
V
structure V40 board
cabinet, 1-2 front panel, 7-3
subrack, 3-1 functionality, 7-2
subrack technical specification, 7-5
interface, 3-3 working principle, 7-2
parameter, 3-6, 4-2 VA4 board
structure, 3-1 front panel, 9-7
functionality, 9-5
technical specification, 9-8

4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


OptiX BWS 1600G
Hardware Description Index

working principle, 9-5 W


VOA board
weight
front panel, 9-9
board, B-1
functionality, 9-9
cabinet, 1-4
technical specification, 9-11
subrack, 3-6
working principle, 9-9

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5